t9366 Instructions

Contents Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate

Driving Machine®
THE BMW X1.

OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 303 - VI/15

X1 Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride
BMW AG
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/15, 07 15 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 182 Refueling
page 232. 184 Fuel
186 Wheels and tires
197 Engine compartment
6 Information
199 Engine oil
At a glance 202 Coolant
14 Cockpit 204 Maintenance
18 iDrive 206 Replacing components
26 Voice activation system 217 Breakdown assistance
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 222 Care
Controls Reference
34 Opening and closing 228 Technical data
52 Adjusting 230 Appendix
64 Transporting children safely 232 Everything from A to Z
68 Driving
81 Displays
97 Lights
102 Safety
120 Driving stability control systems
126 Driving comfort
144 Climate control
151 Interior equipment
160 Storage compartments
Driving tips
168 Things to remember when driving
172 Loading
175 Saving fuel

Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Symbols and displays
Orientation Symbols in the Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Indicates precautions that must be followed
ular topic is by using the index. precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in personal injury and serious damage to the
the first chapter. vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
Updates made after the editorial information.
deadline Refers to measures that can be taken to
Any updates made after the editorial deadline help protect the environment.
can be found in the appendix of the printed "..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
User's manual for Navigation,
activation system.
Entertainment, Communication
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
The topics Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
voice activation system.
munication and the short commands of the
voice activation system can be retrieved on the
Control Display via the Integrated Owner's
Action steps
Handbook. Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
Additional sources of 1. First action step.
information 2. Second action step.
A dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐ Enumerations
swer additional questions at any time. Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is ternative possibilities are presented as list with
available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
BMW Driver’s Guide App ▷ Second possibility.
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the Symbols on vehicle components
Internet: Indicates that you should consult the
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
6
Information
Vehicle features and options Own safety

This Owner's Manual describes all models and
Warranty
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series. Your vehicle is technically configured for the
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐ operating conditions and registration require‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐ ments applying in the country of first delivery
able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
lected optional features or the country-specific to be operated in a different country it might be
version. necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
This also applies to safety-related functions
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
and systems.
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
The respectively applicable country provisions tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
must be observed when using the respective ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
features and systems. formation on warranty is available from a
For any options and equipment not described dealer’s service center.
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Handbooks. Maintenance and repairs
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
are arranged differently from what is shown in materials and high-performance electronics,
the illustrations. requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
Status of the Owner's a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
Manual to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g.
Basic information maintenance and repair, according to BMW
specifications with properly trained personnel,
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
policy of constant development that is con‐
qualified service center or repair shop".
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from damage and related safety risks.
those in your vehicle.
Parts and accessories
Updates made after the editorial BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
deadline cessory products approved by BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline Approved parts and accessories, and advice
can be found in the appendix of the printed on their use and installation are available from
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories were tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
7
Information
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐ Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
sories. Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐ Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
ual product from another manufacturer can be designed to meet the particular operating con‐
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a ditions and homologation requirements in your
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official country and continental region in order to de‐
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
whether these products are suitable for BMW is operated under those conditions. If you wish
vehicles under all usage conditions. to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
California Proposition 65 Warning hicle to meet different prevailing operating
California laws require us to state the following conditions and homologation requirements.
warning: You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
country or region. In such case, please contact
bile components and parts, including compo‐
Customer Relations for further information.
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
Maintenance
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain road safety, operational reliability and the New
products of component wear contain or emit Vehicle Limited Warranty.
chemicals known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures:
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
for US models
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Canadian models
water. If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
Service and warranty ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
We recommend that you read this publication not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ Warranty.
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Data memory
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Many electronic components on your vehicle
ranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ and faults. This technical information generally
ited Warranty. records the state of a component, a module, a
Detailed information about these warranties is system or the environment:
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
8
Information
▷ Operating mode of system components, fill tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
levels for instance. a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ The EDR is designed to record data related to
tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
transverse acceleration. short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
ing the stability control system. operating.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
routes traveled cannot be created from this ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ These data can help provide a better under‐
pair services, service processes, warranty standing of the circumstances in which
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ crashes and injuries occur.
mation can be read out from the event and
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
fault memories by employees of the dealer’s
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
service center or another qualified service cen‐
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
further information there if you need it. After an
error is corrected, the information in the fault However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the
ous basis. type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data To read data recorded by an EDR, special
with individuals if combined with other infor‐ equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
the assistance of an expert. enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
Additional functions that are contractually
the vehicle or the EDR.
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
9
Information
Vehicle identification formation about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.
number
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
The vehicle identification number can be found

in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be

found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
10
Information
11
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
All around the steering wheel
1 Rear window safety switch 49 Front fog lights 100

2 Power windows 48
3 Exterior mirror operation 60 Lights off
4 Central locking system Daytime running lights 99
Unlocking 39 Parking lights 97
Lock 39 Low beams 97
5 Lights
14
Cockpit At a glance
Automatic headlight con‐ 10 Start/stop the engine and switch

trol 98 the ignition on/off 69
Corner-illuminating lights 99
Auto Start/Stop function 70
High-beam Assistant 99
Instrument lighting 100
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 73
Volume
High beams, head‐

Voice activation 26
light flasher 73
High-beam Assistant 99
Telephone
Roadside parking lights 98

Thumbwheel for selection lists 90
12 Horn, total area
On-board computer 90
13 Steering wheel heating 62
7 Shift paddles 77
14 Adjust steering wheel 62
8 Instrument cluster 81
15 Steering wheel buttons, left
9 Steering column stalk, right
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
Wiper 74
ing 132
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

Rain sensor 75
terrupting 126
Store speed 132, 126
Clean the windshields and head‐
lights 75
Resume speed 132, 126
Rear window wiper in Canadian
models 76
Reduce distance 126
Rear window wiper 76
Increase distance 126
Cleaning rear window 76
Cruise control rocker switch 132, 126
16 Unlock hood 197
15
At a glance Cockpit
17 Open the tailgate 40
All around the center console
1 Control Display 18 9 Parking brake 72

2 Ventilation 149 10 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
3 Hazard warning system 217 trol 120
Driving Dynamics Control 124

Intelligent Safety 111
PDC Park Distance Control 135
4 Radio/Multimedia Rearview camera 137
5 Glove compartment 160 Parking assistant 140
6 Climate control 144 HDC Hill Descent Control 122
7 Transmission selector lever 77

8 Controller with buttons 19
16
Cockpit At a glance
All around the roofliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lights 100

quest 217
2 Glass sunroof 49 5 Interior lights 100
3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐

senger airbag 104
17
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options Control elements at a glance
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Control elements
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
the selected options or country versions. This
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept 1 Control Display

The iDrive combines the functions of many 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ the equipment version, with touchpad
ated from a central location.
WARNING Control Display
Operating the integrated information
system and communication devices while driv‐ Information
ing can distract from traffic. It is possible to ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an care instructions.
accident. Only use the systems or devices ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
stop and use the systems and devices while be damaged.
the vehicle is stationary.◀
▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
duced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
the normal functions are re-established.
Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
Switch off
1. Press button.
18
iDrive At a glance
2. "Turn off control display" 3. Move in four directions.
Controller with navigation system Buttons on controller

The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select Press button Function
menu items and enter the settings. MENU Open the main menu.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller. RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
1. Turn. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Displays the previous display.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus
2. Press. directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1. Turn.
19
At a glance iDrive
2. Press.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the
3. Move in two directions.
main menu.
Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

item is highlighted.
Buttons on controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
Audio Open audio menu last listened 2. Press the controller.

to, switch between audio me‐
nus. Menu items in the Owner's Manual
TEL Opens the phone menu. In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
BACK Open previous panel.
"Settings".
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
Operating concept
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Opening the main menu Closes current display and shows previous
Press button. display.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
20
iDrive At a glance
Opens new display on top of previous 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
screen. is displayed.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ 3. Press the controller.
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Opening the Options menu Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
Press button. box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
Additional options: move the controller to the 1. "Settings"
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
2. "Touchpad"
displayed.
3. Select the desired function.
Options menu ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". tive map.
▷ Control options for the selected main ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
▷ If applicable, further operating options for letters and numbers.
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Entering letters and numbers
Changing settings Entering letters requires some practice at the
1. Select a field. beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
21
At a glance iDrive
▷ The system recognizes capital and lower Example: setting the clock
case letters. For the input of upper/lower
case letters and numbers, it may be neces‐ Setting the clock
sary to switch to the corresponding input
On the Control Display:
mode, e.g. when upper and lower case let‐
ters are written the same way. Switching
between cases, numbers and letters, refer 1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐
to page 25. played.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
the Control Display. lighted, and then press the controller.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad. 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad. 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map and Internet

Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.
Function Controls
Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐

Internet sites. spective direc‐
tion. 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on
map or Internet sites. the touchpad with
fingers.
Display the menu or open Tap once.

a link in the Internet.
Changing settings
You may change control display settings via
touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.
22
iDrive At a glance
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning

press the controller.
Text message was received.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller. Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.

Status information SIM card is missing.
Status field Enter PIN.

The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right: Entertainment symbols
▷ Time.
Symbol Meaning
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off. CD/DVD player.
▷ Wireless network reception strength. AUX-IN port.
▷ Phone status.
USB audio interface.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows. Additional symbols
Radio symbols Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are turned off.

Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on. Split screen

General information
Telephone symbols
Additional information can be displayed on the
Symbol Meaning right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the on-board comupter.
Incoming or outgoing call. In the divided screen view, the so-called split
Missed call. screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Wireless network reception
strength. Switching the split screen on and off
Symbol flashes: network search. On the Control Display:
Wireless network is not available.
1. Press button.
Bluetooth is switched on.
2. "Split screen"
Roaming is active.
23
At a glance iDrive
Selecting the display Running a function

On the Control Display: Press button.
The function will work immediately.
1. Press button. This means, e.g., that the number is dialed
2. "Split screen" when a phone number is selected.
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected. Displaying the button assignment
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
content". gloves or use objects.
5. Select the desired menu item. The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
screen.
Programmable memory Deleting the button assignments

buttons 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
General information 2. "OK"
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ Deleting personal in the
tions, phone numbers and menu entries. vehicle
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used. The concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
Without navigation system and personal data, such as stored radio stations.
telephone These personal data can be permanently de‐
On the buttons, only radio stations can be leted through iDrive.
stored.
General information
Saving a function Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Personal Profile settings.
2. Press and hold the desired button,
▷ Stored radio stations.
until a signal sounds.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
24
iDrive At a glance
▷ Travel and on-board comupter information. Symbol Function

▷ Music collection.
Press the controller: delete the let‐
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. ter or number.
▷ Phone book.
Press the controller for an extended
▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies. period: delete all letters or numbers.
▷ Voice notes
▷ Login accounts. Switching between cases, letters and
▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering. numbers
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
to 30 minutes. tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Functional requirement
Symbol Function
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Enter the letters.
Deleting data Enter the numbers.
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display. or Tip controller up.

Without navigation system
2. "Settings"
Select symbol.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete personal data" Entry comparison
5. "Continue" Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
6. "OK" rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
ters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
Entering letters and numbers stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during input
General information for which data is available.
On the Control Display: ▷ Target search: names of locations may be
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ entered in languages available through
bers. Control Display.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if

needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
25
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press button on the steering
wheel.
also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Wait for the signal.
systems. The respectively applicable country 3. Say the command.
provisions must be observed when using the A command that is recognized by the voice
respective features and systems. activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
The concept cates that the voice activation system is active.
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control If no other commands are available, use func‐
Display can be operated by voice com‐ tion via iDrive.
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements Terminating the voice activation
during input. system
▷ Functions that can only be used when the Briefly press the button on the steer‐
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Possible commands
Manual to use with the voice activation Most menu items on the Control Display can
system. be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
Requirements play.
Via the Control Display, set a language that is There are short commands for many functions.
also supported by the voice activation system You may select lists such as phone lists via
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
fied. actly as they show in the respective list.
Set the language, refer to page 94.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹.
E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
26
Voice activation system At a glance
Executing functions using short Setting the voice dialog

commands
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
Execute functions on the main menu via short
version.
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹. The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
Help dialog for the voice activation 1. "Settings"
system
2. "Language/Units"
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹.
3. "Speech type:"
Additional commands for the help dialog:
4. Select setting.
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
One example: open the tone

settings
Adjusting the volume
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
just as they are selected via the controller. structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if volume of other audio sources is changed.
needed.
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
wheel.
3. ›Radio‹
Information on Emergency
4. ›Tone‹
Requests
Via short command Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
The desired tone settings can also be started tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
via a short command. tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if ment of a phone connection.
needed.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 217, close to the interior mirror.
wheel.
3. ›Tone‹
27
At a glance Voice activation system
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
28
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Select components
This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Press button.

2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 3. Press the controller.
the selected options or country versions. This 4. Selecting desired range:
also applies to safety-related functions and ▷ "Quick reference"
provisions must be observed when using the ▷ "Search by pictures"
respective features and systems. ▷ "Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's Manual

in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated

Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of Page by page with link access
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
Turn the controller until the next or previous
mation or possible access.
page is displayed.
Quick Reference Guide
Page by page without link access
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
ping the links.
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
played while driving. the controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ Scroll forward.
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
29
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Context help - Owner's Manual to the

temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐
rectly.
Opening via the iDrive

To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu:
1. Press button or move the controller

to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control

message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the controller

to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press button again to return to last

displayed function.
5. Press button to return to the page of

the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
30
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
31
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Overview

1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Remote control/key 3 Unlock the tailgate
General information 4 Panic mode

The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key. Integrated key
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 45.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 35.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐ Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
mote control, refer to page 204 row 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
34
Opening and closing Controls
Replacing the battery ▷ Interference from radio transmissions

through mobile devices in close proximity
to remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐ Starting the engine via emergency
trol. detection of the remote control
2. Raise the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Have old battery disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another Steptronic transmission: if a respective Check
qualified service center or repair shop Control message appears, hold the remote
or take it to a collection point. control with its back against the marked area
on the steering column. The tailgate button on
the remote control should be at the same
New remote controls
height as the marked area. Press the Start/
New remote controls are available from a Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing
dealer’s service center or another qualified the brake pedal.
service center or repair shop.
If the remote control is not recognized: slightly
change the height position of the remote con‐
Loss of the remote controls
trol and repeat the procedure.
The lost remote control can be blocked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Personal Profile
Emergency detection of remote
control The concept
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start Personal Profile provides three profiles, using
the engine in situations such as the following: which personal vehicle settings can be stored.
Every remote control has one of these profiles
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐
assigned.
mote control by external sources e.g., by
radio masts. If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
▷ Empty battery in remote control.
35
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐ About iDrive:
tomatically applied.
1. "Settings"
If several drivers use their own remote control,
2. "Profiles"
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ 3. Select a profile.
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the ▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
meantime by a person with a different remote are automatically applied.
control. ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
Changes to the settings are automatically mote control being used at the time.
saved in the personal profile. ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
Three personal profiles and a guest profile can ent remote control, this profile will apply to
be created. both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
tiated anymore between the settings for
Adjusting the two remote controls.
The settings for the following systems and
functions are saved in the active profile. The Renaming profiles
scope of storable settings is country- and A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
equipment-dependable. file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
▷ Unlocking and locking. On the Control Display:
▷ Lights. 1. "Settings"
▷ Climate control. 2. "Profiles"
▷ Radio. 3. Open "Options".
▷ Instrument cluster. 4. "Rename current profile"
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone. Resetting profiles
▷ Control Display. The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
▷ Navigation.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera 1. "Settings"
▷ Head-up Display. 2. "Profiles"
▷ Driving Dynamics Control. 3. Open "Options".
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ 4. "Reset current profile"
tion, steering wheel position.
▷ Cruise control.
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
▷ Intelligent Safety.
ported.
Profile management This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
Opening profiles to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐
other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐
file function.
ferent profile may be activated.
36
The following export options are available: The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
▷ Via BMW Online. assigned to the current remote control.
▷ Via the USB port to a USB device.

Display profile list during start
Popular file systems for USB devices are
The profile list can be displayed during each
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐
start to select the desired profile.
ommended formats for profile export.
Other formats may not support the export. On the Control Display:
On the Control Display: 1. "Settings"
1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"
2. "Profiles" 3. Open "Options".
3. "Export profile" 4. "Display user list at startup"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB interface: "USB device" Using the remote control
Importing profiles Information
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be
WARNING
imported via BMW Online.
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
ported via the USB interface.
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ the outside. There is risk of injuries. Take the
ported profile. remote control along so that the vehicle can be
On the Control Display: opened from the outside.◀
1. "Settings"
Unlocking
2. "Profiles"
Press button on the remote control.
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
Depending on the settings, refer to page 45,
USB interface: "USB device" the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Using the guest profile
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are saved in none of the three personal pro‐ In addition, the following functions are exe‐
files. cuted:
This can be useful for drivers who are using ▷ The interior lights are switched on, when it
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their is dark outside, the courtesy lamps are also
own profile. switched on. This function is not available,
if the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ually.
1. "Settings" ▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this
2. "Profiles" function was activated.
3. "Guest"
37
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 46, is Panic mode

disarmed. You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Convenient opening
Press button on the remote control for
Press and hold this button on the re‐ at least 3 seconds.
mote control after unlocking.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote Unlocking the tailgate
control is pressed.
With automatic tailgate operation:
Locking To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
WARNING
Press button on the remote control for
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
approx. 1 second.
ble with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐ The tailgate opens slightly, regardless of
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is whether the vehicle was previously locked or
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the unlocked.
vehicle from the outside when there are people With automatic tailgate operation, the closed
in it.◀ tailgate is automatically opened.
The driver's door must be closed. Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
Press button on the remote control.
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 45.
If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are
locked again as soon as it closes. Take the re‐
being locked.
mote control with you and do not leave it in the
The alarm system, refer to page 46, is armed. cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is
locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is
Switching on interior lights and closed.
courtesy lights
CAUTION
Press button on the remote control with
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the vehicle locked.
the rear window and heat conductors while
The courtesy lamps are only switched on when driving. There is risk of property damage.
it is dark outside. This function is not available, Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
if the interior lamps were switched off man‐ jects do not hit the rear window.◀
ually.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐ Malfunction
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐ Remote control detection by the vehicle can
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti- among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
theft warning system, refer to page 47, are lowing circumstances:
turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
fore pressing the button again.
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
38
▷ Interference of the radio connection from Without remote control

transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power. From the outside
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
WARNING
metal objects.
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
ble with special knowledge.
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity. If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
Do not transport the remote control together
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
with metal objects or electronic devices.
vehicle from the outside when there are people
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also in it.◀
be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐
out remote control, refer to page 39. CAUTION
The door lock is permanently joined with
For US owners only the door. The door handle can be moved.
The transmitter and receiver units comply with When pulling the door handle with the
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ damaged. There is risk of property damage.
erned by the following: Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S. Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
▷ LX8766E.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
▷ LX8CAS. from the inside.
▷ LX8CAS2.
1. Remove lid on the door lock.
▷ MYTCAS4.
To do this, slide the integrated key into the
Compliance statement: opening from below and remove the lid.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to 2. Unlock or lock door lock.
operate this equipment.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is
locked with the integrated key.
39
The alarm system is triggered when the door is ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the on the door to be opened; the first time un‐
door lock. locks the door, the second time opens it.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle The other doors remain locked.
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 35. Tailgate
From the inside Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
Unlocking and locking place the remote control in the cargo area.
Opening
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Opening from the outside
Via the buttons for the central locking system.
▷ By pressing the button, the vehicle

is locked with the doors closed.
▷ Pressing the button unlocks the

vehicle.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking. ▷ Press button next to the tailgate.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. ▷ Press button on the remote con‐
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is trol for approx. 1 second.
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
system and interior lights come on. locked. Unlocking with the remote control,
refer to page 38.
Unlocking and opening
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
▷ Press the central locking system ward.
button to unlock the doors to‐
gether, and then pull the door handle Opening from the inside
above the armrest.
With the vehicle is stationary, press
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
the button in the storage compart‐
door to open the door. The other doors re‐
ment of the driver's door upward.
main locked.
40
Closing When adjusting the opening height, ensure

that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm
Information above the tailgate.
WARNING 1. "Settings"
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ 2. "Tailgate"
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make 3. Turn the controller until the desired open‐
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate ing height is selected.
is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION Opening
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit CAUTION
the rear window and heat conductors while The tailgate swings back and up when it
driving. There is risk of property damage. opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐ sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
jects do not hit the rear window.◀ is clear during opening and closing.◀
Closing
▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior.
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tail‐ ▷ Press button on the remote con‐
gate can be used to conveniently pull down the trol for approx. 1 second.
tailgate. As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Opening with the remote control,
Automatic tailgate operation refer to page 38.
▷ Press button in the storage com‐
Adjusting the opening height partment of the driver's door up‐
You can set how far the tailgate should open. ward.
CAUTION If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
The tailgate swings back and up when it automatically to the adjusted opening height.
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make The opening procedure is interrupted:
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate ▷ By pressing a button again.
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
41
Closing must be outside of the vehicle in the area

of the tailgate.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
is clear during opening and closing.◀ tion.
CAUTION
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Without Comfort Access:
▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior.

Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
▷ Press button in the driver's door

and keep it pressed. Releasing the
button stops window/roof movement.
The remote control must be located in the
▷ Press button on the inside of the tailgate. interior for this function.
An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate
With Comfort Access:
closes.
The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.
Manual operation
WARNING
With manual operation of a blocked tail‐
gate, it can loosen itself unexpectedly from the
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the blockage. There is risk of injuries or risk of
tailgate. property damage. Do not operate the tailgate
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐ manually if it is blocked. Have checked by a
tion. dealer’s service center or another qualified
▷ Press button, arrow 2. service center or repair shop.◀
The vehicle will be locked after closing the In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow
for this purpose and the remote control and smooth motion.
42
Comfort Access Unlocking
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
passenger door completely, arrow.
tions:
This corresponds with pressing the button on
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
the remote control. .
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Separate unlocking of the tailgate.
Locking
▷ Open/close tailgate with no-touch activa‐
tion.
▷ Start the engine.
Information
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ Touch the surface on the door handle of the
ence nearby. driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐
must be located outside of the vehicle near ing the door handle.
the doors. This corresponds with pressing the button on
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not the remote control. .
possible until after approx. 2 seconds. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
mote control is in the vehicle. sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐
cle.
Convenient closing
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
43
in the center of the area at the rear of the car

and the trunk lid opens and/or closes.
Foot movement to be carried out

WARNING
During no-contact activation, vehicle
parts may be touched, e.g. hot exhaust sys‐
tem. There is risk of injuries. With the foot mo‐
tion, make sure there is steady stance and do
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
not touch the vehicle.◀
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger and hold it there without grasping 1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,
the door handle. about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.
This corresponds to pressing and holding 2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
the remote control button. under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
ately pull it back. With this movement, the
In addition to locking, the windows and the leg must pass through the ranges of both
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors sensors.
fold in.
Unlocking the tailgate separately

Press button on tailgate's exterior.
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control. .
The situation of the doors does not change.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the trunk; otherwise, the remote con‐
trol is locked inside the vehicle when the tail‐
gate is closed. Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
CAUTION
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
is clear during opening and closing.◀ tem flashes.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
Opening and closing the tailgate with tailgate can be closed inadvertently by an un‐
no-touch activation conscious or alleged recognized foot move‐
ment.
General information The sensor range reaches approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
The tailgate can be opened with no-touch acti‐ behind the area at the rear of the car.
vation using the remote control you are carry‐
ing. With automatic tailgate operation, it can
also be closed with no-touch activation. Two
sensors detect a forward-directed foot motion
44
WARNING Malfunction
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ Remote control detection by the vehicle can
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate lowing circumstances:
is clear during opening and closing.◀ ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
CAUTION
page 35.
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
transmission towers or other equipment
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
mobile phones or other electronic devices
The hazard warning system flashes on and an in direct proximity.
acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate
Do not transport the remote control together
closes.
with metal objects or electronic devices.
The closing of the tailgate has no effect on the
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
locking of the vehicle.
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not control or using the integrated key, refer to
place the remote control in the cargo area. page 39.
Another foot movement can interrupt the clos‐
ing operation.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the Adjusting
tailgate can be closed inadvertently by an un‐
conscious or alleged recognized foot move‐ Unlocking
ment. The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
The sensor range reaches approx. 5 ft/1.50 m fer to page 35.
behind the area at the rear of the car.
Doors
WARNING
1. "Settings"
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make 2. "Doors/key"
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate 3. Select the symbol.
is clear during opening and closing.◀ 4. Select the desired function:
CAUTION ▷ "Driver's door only"
The tailgate swings back and up when it Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate locks the entire vehicle.
is clear during opening and closing.◀ ▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
45
Tailgate The vehicle locks automatically after

Depending on optional features and country you drive off.
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases. Retrieving the seat and mirror settings
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
1. "Settings"
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
2. "Doors/key" rently used.
3. Select the symbol. When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
4. Select the desired function: are automatically retrieved if this function was
▷ "Tailgate" activated.
Depending on your vehicle's optional WARNING

features, the tailgate is either unlocked There is risk of jamming when moving
or opened. the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)" property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
Depending on your vehicle's optional
justment.◀
features, the tailgate is either unlocked
or opened and the doors unlocked. The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ ory is pressed.
fer to page 35.
1. "Settings" Activating the setting
2. "Doors/key" 1. "Settings"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ 2. "Doors/key"
mation signals. 3. "Last seat position autom."
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Alarm system
Automatic locking
The concept
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 35. When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:
1. "Settings"
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.
2. "Doors/key"
▷ Movements in the interior.
3. Select the desired function:
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
▷ "Lock if no door is opened" tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
The vehicle locks automatically after a the car.
short period of time if no door is ▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
opened.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ "Lock after start driving"
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
46
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ The alarm system is armed.

tem. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights. Doors, hood or tailgate are not correctly
closed. Correctly closed access points are
Arming and disarming the alarm secured.
system
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at
When the still open access is closed, inte‐
the same time.
rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will
be switched on.
Door lock and armed alarm system
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
ing:
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
door lock. The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
Tailgate and armed alarm system until the engine ignition is switched on, but
The tailgate can be opened even when the no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
alarm system is armed. An alarm has been triggered.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again when the doors are locked. Tilt alarm sensor
The hazard warning system flashes once.
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
Panic mode The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
towed.
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for Interior motion sensor
at least 3 seconds. The windows and glass sunroof must be
To switch off the alarm: press any button. closed for the system to function properly.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview Avoiding unintentional alarms

mirror The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every

2 seconds:
47
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and Overview

interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Opening
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or ▷ Press the button to the resistance
switch on the ignition, if needed through point.
emergency detection of remote control, re‐ The window opens while the switch is held.
fer to page 35.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
the remote control on your person, grasp ance point.
the driver side or front passenger side door The window opens automatically. Pressing
handle completely. the switch again stops the motion.
See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 38, via remote control.
Power windows
Closing
Information
WARNING
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
Unattended children or animals can and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
move the vehicle and endanger themselves juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions: that the area of movement of the windows is
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. clear during opening and closing.◀
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows. ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
The window closes while the switch is
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
held.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting point.
and lock the vehicle.◀
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
refer to page 43.
48
Pinch protection system Safety switch

WARNING
General information
When operating the windows, body parts
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
used to prevent children, e.g., from opening
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
and closing the rear windows using the
that the area of movement of the windows is
switches in the rear.
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING Information
Accessories on the windows such as an‐ WARNING
tennas can impact jam protection. There is risk When operating the windows, body parts
of injuries. Do not install accessories in the and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
area of movement of the windows.◀ juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a that the area of movement of the windows is
window closes, closing is interrupted. clear during opening and closing.◀
The window reopens slightly. In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of the

windows, press the safety switch, e.g. if chil‐
Closing without the pinch protection dren or animals are carried in the rear.
system
WARNING
Switching on and off
When operating the windows, body parts Press button.
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐ The LED lights up if the safety func‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure tion is switched on.
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
In case of danger from the outside or if ice Panoramic glass sunroof

might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows: General information
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
and hold it there. operated together or separately, using the
same switch.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
exceeds a certain margin. tion is switched on.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam protection.
49
Information The sliding visor opens, as

long as the switch is held
WARNING
down. If the sliding visor is
Body parts can be jammed on operating already fully open, the glass
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. sunroof opens.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
The glass sunroof closes as
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
long as the switch is held
ing.◀
down. If the glass sunroof is
WARNING already closed or in the tilted
position, the sliding visor
Unattended children or animals can
closes.
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions: ▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The sliding visor opens automatically. If the
sliding visor is already fully open, the glass
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows. sunroof opens automatically.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral. The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
▷ Using vehicle equipment. the glass sunroof is already closed or in the
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ tomatically.
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
and lock the vehicle.◀ tion.
Tilting up and closing tilted glass Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sunroof sliding visor together
Push switch briefly upward. Briefly press the switch twice in
▷ The closed glass sunroof is succession in the desired direc‐
tilted and the sliding visor tion past the resistance point.
opens slightly. The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
▷ The opened glass sunroof sor move together. Pressing the
closes until it is in its tilted switch upward stops the motion.
position. The sliding visor
does not move. ▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 38, via remote control.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof is being closed.
The sliding visor does not move. ▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐
cess, refer to page 43.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and Comfort position

sliding visor separately If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐
▷ Press the switch in the de‐ pletely opened, the comfort position has been
sired direction to the resist‐ attained. In this position the wind noises in the
ance point and hold it there. interior are the least.
50
If desired, continue the movement by Pressing Initializing the system

the switch. The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
Pinch protection system
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ closes without jam protection.
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately WARNING
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from Body parts can be jammed on operating
the tilted position during closing. the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries.
The glass sunroof reopens slightly. Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
WARNING ing.◀
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. Press the switch up and hold it
Make sure that the area of movement of the until the initialization is com‐
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐ plete:
ing.◀ ▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
Closing from the open position pleted when the glass sun‐
without pinch protection roof and sliding visor are
completely closed.
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows: ▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐
tection.
1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain margin.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position

without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.
Initializing after a power failure

After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
51
Controls Adjusting
Adjusting
Vehicle features and options backrest in an as upright position as possible
and do not adjust again while driving.◀
specific and optional features offered with the WARNING
series. It also describes features that are not There is risk of jamming when moving
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
the selected options or country versions. This property damage. Make sure that the area of
also applies to safety-related functions and movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
systems. The respectively applicable country justment.◀
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 56.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 58.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 102.
1 Forward/backward
Front seats 2 Thigh support

3 Seat tilt
Information 4 Lumbar support
WARNING 5 Backrest width
Seat adjustments while driving can lead 6 Height
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle 7 Backrest tilt
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust
the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
52
Adjusting Controls
Forward/backward Seat tilt
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
direction. needed to reach the desired seat tilt.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly making sure it engages Electrically adjustable seats
properly.
Overview
Height
1 Seat and mirror memory

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as 2 Backrest width
needed to reach the desired height. 3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
Backrest tilt 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer
to page 46, is activated for this purpose.
Push the lever and apply your weight to the

backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
53
Controls Adjusting
Adjustments in detail Thigh support

1. Forward/back.
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust

the thigh support.
2. Height.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
3. Seat tilt. decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
4. Backrest tilt.
54
Adjusting Controls
Front seat heating WARNING

Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
Forward/backward
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the journey is continued within approx. 15
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
ically with the temperature selected last. direction.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 176, is acti‐ After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
vated, the heater output is reduced. ward or back slightly making sure it engages
properly.
Can be adjusted forwards or backwards in a ra‐
Switch off
tio of 60/40.
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out. Backrest tilt
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
Rear seats while driving may occur due to unintentional
unlocking of the rear backrests by the loops.
Second row of seats There is risk of injuries. Do not fasten any ob‐
jects to the loops for unlocking the rear back‐
Information rests.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There is
risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of
movement of the center armrest is clear during
folding down.◀
55
Controls Adjusting
Pull the strap and apply your weight to the WARNING

backrest or lift it off, as necessary. The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
Safety belts safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in
the event of an accident or during braking and
Seats with safety belt evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries or
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
equipped with a safety belt. wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING
General information
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
Always make sure that safety belts are being
the protective function of the middle safety
worn by all occupants before driving off.
belt is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries
For the occupants' safety the belt locking or danger to life. If you are using the middle
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
belt out of the holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing Correct use of safety belts
added protection, they are not a substitute for
▷ Wear the belt twist-free and as tight to
safety belts.
your body as possible over your lap and
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point shoulders.
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
▷ Wear the belt deep on your hips over your
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
lap. The belt may not press on your stom‐
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles, ach.
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
▷ Do not wear the belt on your throat, rub it
sengers sitting on the left and right.
on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in across
▷ The inner safety belt buckles of the rear hard or fragile objects.
seat are solely intended for passengers
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
seated in the middle.
▷ Re-tighten the belt frequently upward
Information around your upper body.
WARNING
Buckling the belt
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more
than one person to wear a single safety belt.
Infants and children are not allowed in an occu‐
pant's lap, but must be transported and re‐
spectively secured in designated child restraint
systems.◀
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in

the belt buckle.
56
Adjusting Controls
Unbuckling the belt 3. With the buckle tongue, arrow 1, open the
1. Hold the belt firmly. second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐
nism.
Center safety belt in the rear
Buckling the belt
4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the

roofliner.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and

passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the mounts belts are positioned correctly. The
in the roof. safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt if objects are placed on the front passenger
buckle, arrow 1. seat.
3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the belt
buckle, arrow 2.
Damage to safety belts
Safety belt buckles must audibly click into
place. WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
Unbuckling the belt may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
1. Hold the belt firmly. ing situations:
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. ▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
57
Controls Adjusting
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐ Distance

aged otherwise: Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt is as close as possible to the back of the head.
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
checked. the tilt of the backrest.
Adjusting the height

Front headrests
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐ ▷ To raise: push.
straint supports the back of the head at eye
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
level.◀
headrest down.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the Removing
protective effect in the head and neck area. Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
There is risk of injuries. sitting in the seat in question.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint 1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
General information 2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the straint out completely.
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
58
Adjusting Controls
Rear head restraints Adjusting the height
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye ▷ To raise: push.
level.◀ ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area. Removing
There is risk of injuries. Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint

1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the 2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event straint out completely.
of an accident.
Height Seat and mirror memory

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
Information
approximately at ear level.
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is risk
of an accident. Only retrieve the memory func‐
tion when the vehicle is stationary◀
59
Controls Adjusting
WARNING ▷ Safety function, refer to page 60.

There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of Comfort function
property damage. Make sure that the area of 1. Open the driver's door.
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ 2. If necessary, switch off the ignition.
justment.◀
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
The concept
automatically.
Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
called up. Settings for the backrest width and
lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Safety mode
Overview 1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position

deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
Storing ▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
1. Switch on the ignition. ▷ Press a button on the remote control.
2. Set the desired position. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Press button briefly. The LED in

the button lights up.
Mirrors
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out. Exterior mirrors
If the SET button is pressed accidentally:
General information
Press button again.
The mirror on the passenger side is more
The LED goes out.
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
Calling up settings ror setting is stored for the profile currently
used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
General information mote control, the position is automatically re‐
There are two ways to call up the memory trieved if this function is active.
function:
▷ Comfort function, refer to page 60.
60
Adjusting Controls
Information Automatic Curb Monitor

WARNING
The concept
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.
This improves your view of the curb and other
while changing lanes. There is risk of an acci‐
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic be‐
hind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Activating
Overview 1. Slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Fold in and out

CAUTION
1 Adjusting 61
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
hicle can be damaged in car washes. There is
3 Fold in and out 61 risk of property damage. Before washing, fold
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Selecting a mirror
Press button.
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch. Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Adjusting electrically Beneficial in the following situations:
▷ In car washes.
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed. ▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Saving positions
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 59
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of Automatic heating
mirror.
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
61
Controls Adjusting
Automatic dimming feature ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ rearview mirror and the windshield.
med. Photocells are used to control the Interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 62.
Steering wheel
Interior rearview mirror, manually
dimmable Information
WARNING
Turn knob
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Adjusting
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by

the interior mirror.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic

dimming feature
The concept 1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Heated steering wheel
Photocells are used for control:

▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean. Press button.
62
Adjusting Controls
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
63
Controls Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Information Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
WARNING
child restraint systems provided in accordance
Unattended children or animals can with the age, weight and size of the child.
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. system can no longer be used due to their age,
▷ Releasing the parking brake. weight and size.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
straint system in the front passenger seat,
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ on the front passenger side are deactivated.
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
and lock the vehicle.◀ ger airbags, refer to page 104.
Children should always be in the rear Information

WARNING WARNING
Persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot Active front-seat passenger airbags can
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable injure a child in a child restraint system when
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐ the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
ditional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident
or during braking and evasive maneuvers. WARNING
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure The stability of the child restraint system
persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suita‐ is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
ble restraint systems.◀ adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Accident research shows that the safest place Make sure that the child restraint system fits
for children is in the back seat.
64
Transporting children safely Controls
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐ airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
After installing a child restraint system in the
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
straints or remove them.◀
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 104.
Installing child restraint
systems Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
Before mounting the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
Before mounting child restraint systems, en‐ ble and adjust its height to the highest and
sure that the rear seat backrests are locked. thus best possible position for the belt and to
Move the rear seats into the rearmost position offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
to facilitate assembly of the child restraint sys‐ dent.
tem. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
Information move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
Pay attention to the specifications of the child til the best possible belt guide position is
restraint system manufacturer when selecting, reached.
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Backrest width
WARNING
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
The stability of the child restraint system
child restraint system in the front passenger
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
adjustment or improper installation of the child
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
Child seat security
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
Active front-seat passenger airbags can safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
injure a child in a child restraint system when ten child restraint systems.
the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
65
Controls Transporting children safely
The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐ Unlocking the safety belt
nently locked to fasten child restraint systems. 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
Locking the safety belt 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.
1. Pull out the strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
LATCH child restraint system

Information The corresponding symbol shows the
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
dren. Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH symbols. It is
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
not recommended to use the inner lower an‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
chors of standard outer LATCH positions to
turer when installing and using LATCH child
fasten a child restraint system on the middle
restraint fixing system.
seat. Use the vehicle seat belt instead for the
middle seat.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child Before installing LATCH child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child restraint systems
is restrained by the internal harnesses. Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
straint system.
Information
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
WARNING
systems
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
turer's information.
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is risk of injuries or 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐ erly connected.
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐ Child restraint fixing system with a
curely against the backrest.◀ tether strap
Mounting points
Position
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper Top Tether are
66
Transporting children safely Controls
marked with this symbol. It can be found on Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf. the mounting point
1. Raise the head restraint if needed.
Information 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
CAUTION the supports of the head restraint.
The mounting points for the upper re‐ 3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
taining straps of child restraint systems are the backrest and the cargo cover.
only provided for these retaining straps. When 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be the anchor.
damaged. There is risk of property damage. 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐ down.
per retaining straps.◀
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Retaining strap guide

WARNING Securing of doors and
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly windows in the rear
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐ Rear doors
ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside

only.
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint Safety switch for the rear
3 Hook for upper retaining strap Press button on the driver's door if
4 Mounting point children are being transported in the
5 Seat backrest rear.
6 Upper retaining strap This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 49.
67
Controls Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and options All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Information
systems. The respectively applicable country The ignition is switched off automatically in the
provisions must be observed when using the following situations while the vehicle is station‐
respective features and systems. ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are activated.
Start/Stop button ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
The concept started.
Pressing the Start/Stop button ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
switches the ignition on or off the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
and starts the engine. the low beams are turned off.
Steptronic transmission: The ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
engine starts if the brakes are with driver's door open and low beams off.
stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐ The low beams switch to parking lights after
ton. approx. 15 minutes of no use.
Ignition on Radio ready state

Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop Activate radio-ready state: when the engine is
button without stepping on the brake. running: press the Start/Stop button.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
of time. cally in the following situations:
To save battery power when the engine is off, ▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
electronic systems/power consumers. tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
Ignition off completely, so that the engine can still be
Steptronic transmission: Shift to selector lever started.
position P, press the Start/Stop button again The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g.,
without stepping on the brake. the ignition is automatically switched off for the
following reasons:
68
Driving Controls
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. risk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. ing in quick succession.◀
▷ When automatically switching from low

beams to parking lights. Steptronic transmission
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
Starting the engine
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights 1. Depress the brake pedal.
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped, 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
the daytime running lights are activated. The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Starting the engine
Information Engine stop
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
Information
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can WARNING
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ Unattended children or animals can
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐ move the vehicle and endanger themselves
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐ and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
tion.◀ ▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
WARNING ▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into ▷ Using vehicle equipment.

motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐ There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
rolling. hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured and lock the vehicle.◀
against rolling away, observe the following: WARNING
▷ Set the parking brake. An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
front wheels in the direction of the curb. dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure rolling.
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀ In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
CAUTION against rolling away, observe the following:
In the case of repeated starting attempts ▷ Set the parking brake.

or repeated starting in quick succession, the ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned. front wheels in the direction of the curb.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
69
Controls Driving
Before driving into a car wash ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ driver's door is closed.
serve instructions for going into an automatic In order to be able to release the brake pedal,
car wash, refer to page 222. engage lever in position P. The engine remains
off.
Steptronic transmission To continue driving depress the brake pedal.
When a gear is engaged, the engine starts au‐
Switching off the engine tomatically.
1. Engage selector lever position P with the The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
vehicle stopped. when the engine is switched off.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. Displays in the instrument cluster
The radio-ready state is switched on. The READY display in the tach‐
3. Set the parking brake. ometer signals that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
Auto Start/Stop function
The display indicates that the
The concept conditions for an automatic en‐
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. gine stop have not been met.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving Functional limitations
off. The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
Automatic mode ▷ External temperature too low.
After every start of the engine using the Start/ ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in matic climate control is running.
the last selected state, refer to page 71.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it
or cooled to the required level.
is available when the vehicle is traveling faster
than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h. ▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
Engine stop ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ steering wheel is being turned.
ing a stop under the following conditions: ▷ After driving in reverse.
Steptronic transmission: ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ matic climate control is switched on.
tion D. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the ▷ At higher elevations.
vehicle is stopped. ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
70
Driving Controls
▷ The parking assistant is activated. Activating/deactivating the system

▷ Stop-and-go traffic. manually
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N,
Using the button
M/S or R.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Press button.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it ▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
will not start again automatically if any one of deactivated.
the following conditions are met: The engine is started during an automatic
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and engine stop.
the driver's door is open. The engine can only be stopped or started
▷ The hood was unlocked. via the Start/Stop button.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied ▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
length of time. activated.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button. Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
Functional limitations During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ can be switched off permanently, e. g., when
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ leaving it.
lowing situations: 1. Steptronic transmission: engage selector
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior lever position P.
when the cooling function is switched on. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
▷ The steering wheel is turned. switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ is deactivated.
lector lever position D to R, N or M/S. 3. Set the parking brake.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ Automatic deactivation
matic climate control is switched on. In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. is deactivated automatically for safety reasons
as if the driver were absent.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
71
Controls Driving
Malfunction WARNING
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer Unattended children or animals can
switches off the engine automatically. A Check move the vehicle and endanger themselves
Control message is displayed. It is possible to and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
continue driving. Have the system checked. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Parking brake ▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.

The concept ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐ There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
cle from rolling when it is parked. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
Overview and lock the vehicle.◀
Pull the switch.

The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The

parking brake is set.
Depending on the stopping situation, the park‐

ing brake is engaged automatically.
Steptronic transmission: In some parking sit‐
Parking brake uations, the parking brake is automatically en‐
gaged, when selector lever position P is en‐
gaged. In these cases, the parking brake is
Setting released automatically when you leave the se‐
WARNING lector lever position P.
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
While driving
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against Use as emergency brake while driving:
rolling. Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured hard while the switch is being pulled.
against rolling away, observe the following: The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐
▷ Set the parking brake. nal sounds and the brake lights light
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the up.
front wheels in the direction of the curb. A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
72
Driving Controls
Steptronic transmission: Press the Turn signal, high beams,

switch while the brake is pressed or se‐
lector lever position P is set.
headlight flasher
The LED and indicator lamp go out. Turn signal
The parking brake is released.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Automatic release in cars with When driving and during operation of the turn
Steptronic transmission signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out. Using turn signals
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it. Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
The turn signal lever returns into is starting po‐
After a power failure sition after actuation.
To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
Putting the parking brake into the resistance point.
operation
Triple turn signal activation
Slightly tap lever.
2. Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever position P The turn signal flashes three times.
is set. The function can be activated or deactivated.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be On the Control Display:
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal. 1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking 3. "Triple turn signal"
brake is ready for operation. Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
73
Controls Driving
Signaling briefly WARNING

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold If the wipers start moving in the folded
it there for as long as you want the turn signal away state, damage may occur to parts of the
to flash. vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Malfunction Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp when the wipers are in the folded away state
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
High beams, headlight flasher
Switching on
▷ High beams, arrow 1.

▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
Washer/wiper system The wipers switch to intermittent operation

when the vehicle is stationary.
Switching the wipers on/off and brief ▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
wipe beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
General information hicle comes to standstill.
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause Switch off and brief wipe
them to become worn more quickly.
Information
CAUTION
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor overheat on switching on. There is risk
of property damage. Defrost the windshield
prior to switching the wipers on.◀
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
74
Driving Controls
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed: Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
press down once. the rain sensor
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
Interval mode or rain sensor
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐ or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
ror. sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
Activating/deactivating
sensor.
Clean the windshield
Press button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
CAUTION
WARNING
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes. The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
There is risk of property damage. Deactivate dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
the rain sensor in car washes.◀ view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze if needed.◀
CAUTION
When the wiper water container is
empty, the wash pump cannot work as in‐
tended. There is risk of property damage. Do
75
Controls Driving
not use the washer system when the wash wa‐ and the wipers are folded in when switching
ter container is empty.◀ on.◀
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

Windshield washer nozzles
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ are not frozen to the windshield.
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
Rear window wiper
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
Switching on the rear window wiper
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.

2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward,
arrow 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is Information
engaged, the system switches to continuous
WARNING
operation.
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
Cleaning rear window is risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe the
In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐ instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
row 2. The switch automatically returns to its away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
interval position when released. ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3. erating materials out of reach of children.
The switch automatically returns to its idle po‐ United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
sition when released. regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
Fold-out position of the wipers fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
Fold wipers back when you want to change the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
blades or with pending low temperatures. tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
WARNING
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, damage may occur to parts of the WARNING
vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is Improperly executed work under the
risk of injuries or risk of property damage. hood can damage components and lead to a
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off safety risk. There is risk of accidents or risk of
when the wipers are in the folded away state property damage. Have work under the hood
76
Driving Controls
be executed by a dealer’s service center or an‐ N Neutral:

other qualified service center or repair shop.◀ The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car
washes, e.g.
Washer fluid reservoir
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
hicle may begin to move.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ performance. Step on the accelerator pedal
ervoir in the engine compartment. beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ position.
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ Engaging selector lever positions
turer's recommendations. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
right mixture. pedal until you are ready to start.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the
water; this could damage the wiper system. engine is running.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the
ferent manufacturers because they can clog brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever
the windshield washer nozzles. position P or N; otherwise, the selector lever is
blocked: shift lock.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter. A block prevents the inadvertent switching to
selector lever position P or R or the inadvertent
change from selector lever position P.
Steptronic transmission
Selector lever positions
D Drive
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
77
Controls Driving
Canceling the lock If the situation requires, the Steptronic trans‐

mission continues to shift automatically.
Example: once maximum engine speed is at‐
tained, M/S manual mode is automatically up‐
shifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode

▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
Press button on the front of the selector lever, wards.
arrow. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
Sport program and manual mode not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
Activating the sport program strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐
lected gear.
Steptronic Sport transmission:

prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of
the following conditions is met:
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ ▷ DSC deactivated.
tor lever position D. ▷ TRACTION activated.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ In addition, there is no downshift for kickdown.
ment cluster, e.g., S1. With the respective transmission version, the
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
vated. taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐
duced via the shift paddles when switching
Activating the M/S manual mode
briefly from selector lever position D to manual
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of mode.
selector lever position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it Ending the sport program/manual
backward. mode
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is Push the selector lever to the right.
changed. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
78
Driving Controls
Shift paddles Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is dis‐
played, e.g.: P.
Manually release the transmission

lock
Should the selector lever be blocked in selec‐
tor lever position P despite the ignition being
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow turned on, the brake being depressed and the
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both unlock button being pressed, the transmission
hands on the steering wheel. lock can be manually canceled:
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. Before unlocking the transmission lock man‐
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle. ually, set the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling away.
▷ With the respective transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected 1. Loosen the sleeve of the selector lever.
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
2. Pull the sleeve over the selector lever. Un‐
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine plug the cable connector if needed.
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 206, press
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ the yellow release lever downward, arrow.
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
transmission temporarily switches to manual
mode.
If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐
sition D with the respective transmission ver‐
sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐
matic mode:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. 4. Move the selector lever slightly toward the
or rear; to do this press the unlock button on
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift the front of the selector lever.
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. Release the release lever.
In the manual mode, after conservative driving 5. Bring the selector lever into the desired
for a certain amount of time or if there has position.
been no acceleration or shifting of the shift
paddles within a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
79
Controls Driving
Steptronic Sport transmission: A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐

Launch Control ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
The concept 3 seconds, release the brake.
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
on surfaces with good traction. mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 168, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button and select SPORT

with the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster in combination with SPORT and the
DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
80
Displays Controls
Displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Speedometer 5 Electronic displays 81

2 Messages, e.g. Check Control 6 Fuel gauge 86
3 Tachometer 86 7 Reset miles 86
4 Current fuel consumption
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 90. ▷ Date, refer to page 86.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 86. ▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 87.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 70. ▷ Transmission display, refer to page 79.
▷ On-board computer, refer to page 90. ▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 86.
81
Controls Displays
▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the
page 82. driver or passenger side is not buckled. The
▷ Navigation display. safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
▷ Range, refer to page 86.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
correctly.
page 124.
▷ Service requirements, refer to page 87.
Airbag system
▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 88.
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
▷ Time, refer to page 86.
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
Check Control by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions Parking brake
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions The parking brake is set.
in the monitored systems.
For additional information, refer to Re‐
A Check Control message is displayed as a lease parking brake, refer to page 72.
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display. Brake system
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a Braking system disrupted. Continue to
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐ drive moderately.
play. Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
Indicator/warning lights qualified service center or repair shop.
General information
Front-end collision warning
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ Illuminated: advance warning is issued,
nations and colors. e.g., when there is the impending dan‐
ger of a collision or the distance to the
Several of the lights are checked for proper
vehicle ahead is too small.
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on. Increase distance.
Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐
Red lights ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches
another vehicle at a relatively high differential
Safety belt reminder speed.
Safety belt on the driver's side is not Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
buckled. For some country-specific neuver.
models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
seat.
82
Displays Controls
Pedestrian warning lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving style to

the driving circumstances.
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
Illuminated: DSC failed. Have system checked
If a collision with a person detected in
immediately by a dealer’s service center or an‐
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
other qualified service center or repair shop.
up and a signal sounds.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 120.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
The number bars shows the selected Control is activated
distance from the vehicle driving
ahead. Dynamic Stability Control DSC is
switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐
For additional information, refer to Camera-
trol DTC is switched on.
based cruise control with Stop & Go function,
ACC, refer to page 126. For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 120, and
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control page 121.
Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐
tected. Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
quate for operating the system.
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
The system was deactivated but applies the
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
brakes until you actively resume control by
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
neuvers.
pedal.
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
fer to page 109.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Avoid sudden braking as much as pos‐ Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor
sible. Braking force boost may not be signals a loss of tire inflation pressure
working. Stop cautiously. Take into ac‐ in a tire.
count the longer brake distance. Have Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
checked immediately by a dealer’s sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
service center or another qualified Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
service center or repair shop. flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
detected.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control ▷ Interference through systems or devices
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐ ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
83
Controls Displays
▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
the reset of the system again. refer to page 73.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s Parking lights, headlight control
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed. Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked imme‐
diately by a dealer’s service center or an‐ For additional information, refer to
other qualified service center or repair Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐
shop. fer to page 97.
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor, refer to page 105. Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
Steering system For additional information, refer to
Steering system in some cases not Front fog lights, refer to page 100.
working.
Have steering system checked imme‐ High-beam Assistant
diately by a dealer’s service center or another High-beam Assistant is switched on.
qualified service center or repair shop.
High beams are activated and off auto‐
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
Engine functions uation.
Have vehicle checked immediately by a For additional information, refer to High-beam
dealer’s service center or another Assistant, refer to page 99.
For additional information, refer to On-board Cruise control
Diagnostics socket, refer to page 205.
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐
Lane departure warning trol elements on the steering wheel.
System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected Blue lights
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐ High beams
ture warning, refer to page 117. High beams are activated.
For additional information, refer to High
Green lights beams, refer to page 74.
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
84
Displays Controls
General lamps Hiding Check Control messages
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
and warning lights.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
Supplementary text messages played continuously and are not cleared
Additional information, such as on the cause of until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
an error or the required action, can be called up eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
via Check Control. sages are displayed consecutively.
With urgent messages the added text will be These messages can be faded for approx.
automatically displayed on the Control Display. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
Symbols ▷ Other Check Control messages are faded
Within the supplementary text, the following automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
functions can be selected independent of the They are stored and can be displayed
check control message. again later.
▷ Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the Displaying stored Check Control
Integrated Owner's Manual. messages
▷ "Service request" On the Control Display:
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐ 1. "Vehicle info"

other qualified service center or repair 2. "Vehicle status"
shop.
3. "Check Control"
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
4. Select the text message.
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
85
Controls Displays
Fuel gauge There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Vehicle tilt position may cause WARNING

the display to vary.
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
Depending on the equipment there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g. on
version, the arrow beside the bridges or shady sections of road. There is risk
fuel pump symbol shows which of an accident. Adjust your driving style to the
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Hints on refueling, refer to page 182.
Time
Tachometer The time is displayed in the in‐
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning strument cluster.
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐ Setting the time on the Control
rupted to protect the engine. Display, refer to page 93.
Odometer and trip odometer Date

The date is displayed in the in‐
Display
strument cluster.
▷ Odometer, arrow 1. Set the date on the Control Dis‐
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. play, refer to page 94.
Range
Show/reset kilometers
Display
Press the knob.
With a low remaining range:
▷ When the ignition is
▷ A Check Control message is
switched off, the time, the
displayed briefly.
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed. ▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
puter.
odometer is reset.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, e.g. taking
curves aggressively, the engine function is
not always ensured.
External temperature
The Check Control message appears continu‐
If the indicator drops to ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
86
Displays Controls
CAUTION Energy recovery

With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have Display
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
The energy of motion of the ve‐
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
hicle is converted to electrical
fuel promptly.◀
energy while coasting. The vehi‐
cle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be re‐
Current fuel consumption duced.
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐ Service requirements
sumption. Check whether you
are currently driving in an effi‐ The concept
cient and environmentally-
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
friendly manner.
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
Instrument cluster with enhanced nance.
features A service advisor can read out the current
Displays the current fuel con‐ service requirements from your remote con‐
sumption. Check whether you trol.
are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentally- Display
friendly manner.
Detailed information on service
requirements
Displaying the current fuel
More information on the scope of service re‐
consumption
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
Depending on your vehicle's optional features, play.
the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐
played as bar in the instrument cluster. 1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
1. "Settings"
3. "Service required"
2. "Instrument cluster"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
3. "Additional indicators"
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
87
Controls Displays
Symbols Gear shift indicator

Sym‐ Description The concept
bols
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
No service is currently required. cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐ Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐
tion is approaching. tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐
tronic transmission and with manual
The service deadline has already
transmission.
passed.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
Entering appointment dates On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
Enter the dates for the required inspections. engaged gear is displayed.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly. Steptronic transmission: displays
Example Description
1. "Vehicle info"
Fuel efficient gear is set.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection" Shift into fuel efficient gear.
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored. Speed limit detection
Automatic Service Request The concept

Data regarding the service status or legally Speed limit detection
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service cen‐
shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
ter before a service due date.
detected speed limit. The camera in the area of
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐ the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs
ter was notified. at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐
On the Control Display: head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐
bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐
1. "Vehicle info"
tected and compared with the vehicle's
2. "Vehicle status" onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and
3. Open "Options". will be displayed depending on the situation.
4. "Last Service Request"
88
Displays Controls
With the navigation system, the system takes Display

into account the information stored in the navi‐ The following is displayed in the instrument
gation data and also displays speed limits cluster:
present on routes without signs.
Without a navigation system, the system is Speed limit detection
subject to limitations imposed by technology.
The last speed limit detected.
Speed limits with extra text characters are al‐
ways displayed. Without a navigation system the
traffic signals are grayed out af‐
Information ter curves or longer stretches of
roadway.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the With navigation system:
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐ Speed limit detection is not
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐ available.
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀ Without navigation system:
Speed limit detection switched
Overview on but no speed limit or cancel‐
lation is detected.
Camera
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
view mirror.
front of you.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
Switching on/off ered by a sticker, etc.
1. "Settings" ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
2. "Instrument cluster" camera.
3. "Speed limit information" ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can system are incorrect.
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
ment cluster via the on-board comupter. tem.
89
Controls Displays
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, Activating a list and adjusting the
such as due to changes in road routing. setting
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists in the

instrument cluster
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
The concept
list.
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the following can be displayed or operated us‐ Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.
steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐
strument cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source. On-board computer
▷ Redial phone feature.
Calling up information on the info
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
display
Display
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
Depending on your vehicle's optional features, Information is displayed in the info display of
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from the instrument cluster.
the illustration shown.
Information at a glance
Info display
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
info display:
90
Displays Controls
▷ Range. Average speed

▷ ECO PRO bonus range. Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
▷ Average fuel consumption. engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed. Resetting average values
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system. Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
Adjusting the info display Engine temperature display

Depending on the vehicle equipment version, Displays the current engine temperature,
you can select what information from the on- based on a combination of coolant and motor
board computer is to be displayed on the info oil temperature. As soon as the optimum oper‐
display of the instrument cluster. ating temperature has been attained, the indi‐
On the Control Display: cator is in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, thus the engine, be‐
1. "Settings"
come too hot, a Check Control message is dis‐
2. "Instrument cluster" played.
3. Select the desired displays. Check the coolant level, refer to page 202.
Information in detail Distance to destination

The distance remaining to the destination is
Range
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
Displays the estimated cruising range available gation system before the trip is started.
with the remaining fuel.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
It is calculated based on your driving style over tomatically.
the last 20 miles/30 km.
Time of arrival
Average fuel consumption
The estimated time of arrival is
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
displayed if a destination is en‐
the period while the engine is running.
tered in the navigation system
The average fuel consumption is calculated for before the trip is started.
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
on-board comupter.
The time must be correctly set.
91
Controls Displays
Speed limit detection Sport displays

Description of the speed limit detection, refer
to page 88, function. The concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments can
Trip on-board computer be displayed, and the vehicle condition can be
The vehicle features two types of on-board checked before the use of the SPORT pro‐
computers. gram.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary. Sport instruments
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an On the Control Display, values for power and
overview of the current trip. torque are displayed.
Resetting the trip on-board computer Displaying sport instruments

On the Control Display: About iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info" 1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer" 2. "Sport displays"
3. "Reset": all values are reset. 3. "Sports instruments"
"Automatically reset": all values are reset Via the Driving Dynamics Control
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a 1. Activating SPORT.
standstill.
2. "Sport displays"
Display on the Control Display 3. "Sports instruments"
Display the on-board comupter or trip on-
Vehicle state
board computer on the Control Display.
The following vehicle and environment data
are evaluated:
1. "Vehicle info" ▷ Engine temperature.
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" ▷ External temperature.
▷ Tire temperature and tire inflation pres‐
Resetting the fuel consumption and
sure.
speed
Tire temperature and tire filling pressure are
determined while driving.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" Checking vehicle state
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" About iDrive:
4. "Yes" 1. "Vehicle info"

2. "Sport displays"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activating SPORT.
92
Displays Controls
2. "Sport displays" The current vehicle speed is stored as the

3. "Vehicle and surroundings" speed warning.
Speed warning Settings on the Control

Display
The concept
Displays a speed, when reached, should cause Time
a warning to be issued.
Setting the time zone
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed once by at least 1. "Settings"
3 mph/5 km/h. 2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
Displaying, setting or changing the
4. Select the desired time zone.
speed warning
The time zone is stored.
1. "Settings" Setting the time

2. "Speed" 1. "Settings"
3. "Warning at:" 2. "Time/Date"
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed 3. "Time:"
is displayed. 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
5. Press the controller. are displayed.
Speed warning is stored. 5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
Activating/deactivating the speed nutes are displayed.
warning
The time is stored.
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed" Setting the time format
3. "Warning" 1. "Settings"
4. Press the controller. 2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"
Setting your current speed as the 4. Select the desired format.
speed warning
The time format is stored.
1. "Settings" Automatic time setting
2. "Speed" Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
3. "Select current speed"
updated automatically.
1. "Settings"
93
Controls Displays
2. "Time/Date" Units of measurement

3. "Auto time set"
Setting the units of measurement
Date To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
Setting the date
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
2. "Time/Date"
3. Select the desired menu item.
3. "Date:"
4. Select the desired unit.
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
used.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month Brightness
and year.
The date is stored. Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Brightness"
3. "Format:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
4. Select the desired format. ness is set.
The date format is stored. 5. Press the controller.
Language
used.
Setting the language Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units" Head-up Display
3. "Language:"
Overview
4. Select the desired language.
used.
Setting the voice dialog

Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 27.
94
Displays Controls
The concept Selecting displays in the Head-up

This system projects important information Display
into the driver's field of vision, e. g., the speed. On the Control Display:
The driver can quickly absorb information and 1. "Settings"
concentrate on the traffic situation.
2. "Head-Up Display"
Information 3. "Displayed information"
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head- 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
up Display, refer to page 225. Display.
Display visibility used.
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors: Setting the brightness
▷ Certain sitting positions. The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. On the Control Display:
▷ Wet roads. 1. "Settings"
▷ Unfavorable light conditions. 2. "Head-Up Display"
If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐ 3. "Brightness"
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
another qualified service center or repair shop. ness is set.
Switching on/off
1. "Settings" When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
2. "Head-Up Display" ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
3. "Head-Up Display" Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Display
Adjusting the height
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display: 1. "Settings"
▷ Speed. 2. "Head-Up Display"
▷ Navigation system. 3. "Height"
▷ Check Control messages. 4. Turn the controller until the desired height
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. is reached.
▷ Driver assistance systems. 5. Press the controller.
Some of this information is only displayed Settings are stored for the profile currently
briefly as needed. used.
95
Controls Displays
Setting the rotation

The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
used.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
have the special windshield replaced by a
96
Lights Controls
Lights
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function
This chapter describes all standard, country- Parking lights
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Low beams
systems. The respectively applicable country Instrument lighting
Overview Parking lights, cornering

lights and roadside parking
Switches in the vehicle lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The light switch elements is located next to the
steering wheel. The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
Light functions riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
Symbol Function gine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
Front fog lights
side parking lamp, refer to page 98.
Automatic headlight control

Low beams
Position of switch:
Corner-illuminating lights
The low beams light up when the ignition is
Lights off switched on.
Daytime running lights
97
Controls Lights
Roadside parking lights Headlight courtesy delay feature

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio-
ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. 3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
Switching on Settings are stored for the profile currently
With the ignition switched off, press the lever used.
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Automatic headlight control
Switch off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in The concept
the opposite direction. The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, e.g. in tunnels, in twilight or if there is
Welcome lights and precipitation.
headlight courtesy delay
feature General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
Welcome lights cause the lights to be switched on.
Depending on the equipment, when switching When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
off the vehicle, switch position or . the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
The parking and interior lights light up briefly ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
when the vehicle is unlocked and depending The low beams always stay on when the fog
on the ambient brightness. lights are activated.
Activating/deactivating Activating
On the Control Display: Position of switch:
1. "Settings" The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

lights up when the low beams are switched on.
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights" System limits
Settings are stored for the profile currently The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
used. as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
98
Lights Controls
E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or Activating

hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Daytime running lights

Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐ 1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
tion . switch into position or .
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
Cornering lamp The indicator lamp in the instrument
Position of switch: cluster lights up.
When going around corners, the cornering
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
light also lights the interior area of the curve.
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
Below a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h
when the turn signal is switched on and the The system responds to light from oncoming
steering angle is detected, there is automatic traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
activation. adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
Malfunction ment cluster lights up when the system
A Check Control message is displayed. switches on the high beams.
Cornering light is disrupted or failed. Have the
system checked as soon as possible. Switching the high beams on and off
manually
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the low beams are activated, this system
automatically switches the high beams on and
off. The procedure is controlled by a camera
on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The
assistant ensures that the high beams are acti‐
vated whenever the traffic situation allows. The
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
driver can intervene at any time and switch the
high beams on and off as usual. In the low ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
speed range, the high beams are not switched
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
on by the system.
when manually adjusting the light.
99
Controls Lights
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press Instrument lighting

the button on the turn signal lever, refer to
page 99. Adjusting
System limits The parking lights or low beams

must be switched on to adjust
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
the brightness.
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In situation that Adjust the brightness with the
require this, therefore switch off manually. thumbwheel.
The system is not fully functional in situations

such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary: Interior lights
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation. General information
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐
and wagons; when driving close to train or cally.
ship traffic; and at animal crossings. Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ trols brightness of some of these features.
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on freeways. Overview
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights 1 Interior lights
The low beams must be switched on. 2 Reading lamp
Press button. The green indicator

lamp lights up. Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 98, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front To switch off permanently: press the button for
fog lights. approx. 3 seconds.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are Switch back on: press button.
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
100
Lights Controls
Reading lights
Press button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear

next to the interior lights.
Ambient light
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
Selecting color scheme

About iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select desired setting.
To deactivate the ambient light: "Off".
Setting the brightness

About iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
101
Controls Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in side of the body in the chest and lap area.
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint. Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
102
Safety Controls
Ejection Mitigation ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front

The head airbag system is designed as an passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
through side windows during rollovers or side devices or' mobile phones.
impact events. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Knee airbag ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal other objects on the front passenger seat
impact. that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
Protective action ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ jackets, over the backrests.
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
collisions. nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
Information for optimum effect of the the dashboard, and the seats.
airbags
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
WARNING Even when you follow all instructions very
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐ closely, injury from contact with the airbags
ployment area of the airbags is impacted, the cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
airbag system cannot protect as intended or The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
cause additional injuries due to triggering. short-term and, in most cases, temporary
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Ob‐ hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
serve the Information for optimum protective
effect of the airbag system.◀ Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads Functional readiness of the airbag
away from the side airbag. system
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
Information
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep WARNING
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as Individual components can be hot after
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐ triggering of the airbag system. There is risk of
gered. injuries. Do not touch individual components.◀
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and WARNING
legs in the floor area. Improperly executed work can lead to
▷ There should be no persons, animals or failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
objects between an airbag and a person. of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
spective accident severity. There is risk of
modify them in any way.
103
Controls Safety
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐ Malfunction of the automatic
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐ deactivation system
ped by a dealer’s service center or another When transporting older children and adults,
qualified service center or repair shop.◀ the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
Correct function the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster In this case, change the sitting position so that
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
the operational readiness of the entire airbag and the indicator lamp goes out.
system and the belt tensioner. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
Airbag system malfunctioning To enable correct recognition of the occupied
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the seat cushion
ignition is turned on. ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat.
seat passenger airbags
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
The concept passenger seat if a child restraint system is
The system reads if the front passenger seat is to be installed on it.
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
sistance. could press against the seat from below.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated. Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
Information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
WARNING
The ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, it must be detected, whether a
person occupies the front passenger seat. The
entire seat cushion area must be used for this The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
purpose. There is risk of injuries or danger to ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps front-seat passenger airbags.
his or her feet in the floor area.◀ The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
104
Safety Controls
▷ The indicator lamp lights up A corresponding message appears on the

when a child is properly Control Display.
seated in a child restraint fix‐
1. Press the switch and move the respective
ing system or when the seat
seat all the way forward.
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not 2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
activated. still moves forward slightly.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient The calibration procedure is completed when
size is detected on the seat. The airbags the message on the Control Display disap‐
on the front passenger side are activated. pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
Detected child seats peat the calibration.
The system generally detects children seated If the message does not disappear after a re‐
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐ peat calibration, have the system checked as
quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐ soon as possible.
factured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
The concept
Strength of the driver's and front-seat The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
passenger airbag the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
The explosive power that activates driver's/
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
front passenger's airbags very much depends
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
and tire temperature.
er's seat.
With a respective message appearing on Con‐ Information
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep
With use of the system observe further infor‐
the accuracy of this function over the long-
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
term.
fer to page 186.
Calibrating the front seats
Functional requirements
WARNING The system must have been reset with the
There is risk of jamming when moving correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
property damage. Make sure that the area of not assured.
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ Reset the system after each adjustment of the
justment.◀ tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
105
Controls Safety
Status display On the Control Display and on the vehicle:

The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ 1. "Vehicle info"
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
2. "Vehicle status"
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
3. "Perform reset"
1. "Vehicle info"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
2. "Vehicle status"
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" reset".
The status is displayed. 6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
Status control display
tus is displayed.
Tire and system status are indicated by the
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
color of the wheels and a text message on the
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
Control Display.
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
All wheels green
The progress of the reset is displayed.
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during After a successfully completed Reset, the
the last reset. wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
One wheel is yellow active" is displayed.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
the indicated tire. you continue the reset resumes automatically.
All wheels are yellow Low tire pressure message

A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
several tires. Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
Wheels, gray tire inflation pressure.
The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a ▷ No reset was performed for the system.
malfunction. The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
Status information the last reset.
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
actual values read; they may vary depending Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
on driving style or weather conditions. vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
Carry out reset normal tires or run-flat tires.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the Run-flat tires, refer to page 192, are la‐
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or beled with a circular symbol containing the
wheel change. letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
106
Safety Controls
WARNING 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, the next opportunity.
such as steering and braking response. Run- If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is is shown to be correct, it is possible that
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. a reset. In that case, carry out a reset.
Observe the information on run-flat tires and
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
continued driving with these tires.◀
tire inflation pressure:
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
Dynamic Stability Control. inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
ing style and road conditions.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
Normal tires
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
1. Identify the damaged tire.
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
Do this by checking the air pressure in all braking, a longer braking distance and different
four tires. self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
not have been initialized. In this case, initi‐ potholes, etc.
alize the system. Because the possible driving distance de‐
If identification of flat tire damage is not pends on how the vehicle is used during the
possible, please contact a dealer’s service trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
center or another qualified service center ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
or repair shop. ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
2. Rectify the flat tire on the damaged wheel. WARNING
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, Your vehicle handles differently when a
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
this case, have the electronics checked at the tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
next opportunity and have them replaced if reduced when braking, braking distances are
needed. longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is risk of an accident.
Run-flat tires Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
Final tire failure
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
Continued driving with a flat tire cate the final failure of a tire.
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ dent.
vers.
107
Controls Safety
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
service center or another qualified service cen‐ ing situations:
ter or repair shop. ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
Required tire inflation pressure check service center or another qualified service
message center or repair shop as needed.
A Check Control message is displayed in the ▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
following situations dealer’s service center or another qualified
▷ The system has detected a wheel change, service center or repair shop.
but no reset was done. ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to Reset the system again.
specifications. ▷ Interference through systems or devices
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
the level of the last confirmation. ing the area of the interference, the system
In this case: automatically becomes active again.
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as

Declaration according to NHTSA/
needed.
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire System
change.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
System limits flated to the inflation pressure recommended
The system does not function properly if a re‐ by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
reported though tire inflation pressures are vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
correct. indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
The tire inflation pressure depends on the pressure label, you should determine the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
temperature falls again. These circumstances sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
may cause a warning when temperatures fall significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
very sharply. the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
The system cannot indicate sudden serious should stop and check your tires as soon as
tire damage caused by external circumstances. possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
Malfunction
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
The yellow warning lamp flashes and ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
then lights up continuously. A Check vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
Control message is displayed. No flat note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
tected. responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
108
Safety Controls
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low Status display

tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ whether or not the FTM is active.
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure 1. "Vehicle info"
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ The status is displayed.
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator Initialization
is illuminated, the system may not be able to When initializing the once set inflation tire
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. pressures serve as reference values in order to
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
reasons, including the installation of replace‐ firming the tire inflation pressures.
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle Do not initialize the system when driving with
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ snow chains.
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement 1. "Vehicle info"
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS 2. "Vehicle status"
to continue to function properly.
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The concept
The initialization is completed while driving,
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss which can be interrupted at any time.
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
The initialization automatically continues when
tween the individual wheels while driving.
driving resumes.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of Indication of a flat tire
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire. The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
Functional requirements 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
The system must have been initialized when Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ vers.
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
normal tires or run-flat tires.
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
109
Controls Safety
Run-flat tires, refer to page 192, are la‐ If identification of flat tire damage is not
beled with a circular symbol containing the possible, please contact a dealer’s service
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
WARNING
2. Rectify the flat tire on the damaged wheel.
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
Run-flat tires
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
Maximum speed
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. You may continue driving with a damaged tire
Observe the information on run-flat tires and at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
continued driving with these tires.◀
Continued driving with a flat tire
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
bility Control is switched on if needed.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
System limits vers.
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
check the tire inflation pressure regularly. the next opportunity.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐ is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
vance. have been initialized. In this case, initialize
The system could be delayed or malfunction in the system.
the following situations: Possible driving distance with complete loss of
▷ When the system has not been initialized. tire inflation pressure:
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
surface. inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction ing style and road conditions.
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). A vehicle with an average load has a possible
▷ When driving with snow chains. driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
Actions in the event of a flat tire ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
Normal tires self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
1. Identify the damaged tire. style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
potholes, etc.
four tires.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
the system.
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
110
Safety Controls
WARNING tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐

Your vehicle handles differently when a fere in the respective situations.◀
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
WARNING
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are Due to system limits, individual functions
longer and the self-steering properties will can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
change. There is risk of an accident. with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ Overview
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of Button in the vehicle
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
ter or repair shop.
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Intelligent Safety button
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system. Depending on
how the vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety Switching on/off
consists of one or more systems that can help
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
prevent a imminent collision.
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐ gent Safety systems activate according to the
ing function, refer to page 112. last setting.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 114. Press button briefly:
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to ▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
page 117. system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
Information cording to their respective set‐
WARNING tings.
Indicators and warnings do not relieve ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐ tive to their individual settings.
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
may not be output or they may be output too stored for the profile currently used.
late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
111
Controls Safety
Press button again: Detection range

▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:

turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
It responds to objects if they are detected by

the system.
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking function Information
The concept WARNING
The system can help prevent accidents. If an Indicators and warnings do not relieve
accident cannot be prevented, the system will from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
help reduce the collision speed. tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ may not be output or they may be output too
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
ently if needed. Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
The automatic braking intervention is done fere in the respective situations.◀
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror WARNING
controls the system. Due to system limits, individual functions
The front-end collision warning is available can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
even if cruise control has been deactivated. with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐
tow-starting/towing.◀
actions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
40 mph/60 km/h.
112
Safety Controls
Overview ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐

tive to their individual settings.
Button in the vehicle Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:

activated.
Hold down button:

Intelligent Safety button turned off.
Camera
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
The selected warning time is stored for the
profile currently used.
Warning with braking function
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ Display
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
Switching on/off ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
driving-off. Brake and increase distance.
Switching on/off manually Symbol flashes red and an acoustic

signal sounds: acute warning.
Press button briefly:
You are requested to intervene by
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
system is displayed. The systems
ver.
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
113
Controls Safety
Prewarning E. g. the following situations may not be de‐

This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the tected:
impending danger of a collision or the distance ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
to the vehicle ahead is too small. them at high speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
is a prewarning. you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
Acute warning with braking function
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ Functional limitations
proaches another object at a relatively high dif‐
The system may not be fully functional in the
ferential speed.
following situations:
The driver must intervene actively when there
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
fall.
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision. ▷ In tight curves.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
previous forewarning. deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mir‐
Braking intervention ror is dirty or obscured.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ gine, via the Start/Stop button.
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on ately after vehicle delivery.
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is risk of a ▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
come to a complete stop. low in the sky.
The braking intervention is executed only if

Warning sensitivity
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
The braking intervention can be interrupted by e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
tively moving the steering wheel. cess of false warnings.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered. Pedestrian warning with city
System limits
braking function
The concept
Detection range
The system can help prevent accidents with
The system's detection potential is limited.
pedestrians.
Thus a system reaction might not come or
The system issues a warning in the city driving
might come late.
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
114
Safety Controls
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
function. Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
The camera in the area of the rearview mirror tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
controls the system. fere in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
General information
Due to system limits, individual functions
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
Under those circumstances it reacts to people tow-starting/towing.◀
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Overview
Detection range
Button in the vehicle
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐

ided into two areas Intelligent Safety button
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle. Camera
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Information
WARNING The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐ Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
may not be output or they may be output too
115
Controls Safety
Switching on/off ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
Switching on automatically the brake pedal. The system can assist with
The system is automatically active after every some braking intervention if there is risk of a
driving-off. collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Switching on/off manually The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
cording to their respective set‐ Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
tings. of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
System limits
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used. Detection range
Press button again: The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
activated. Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
Hold down button: tected:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are ▷ Partially covered pedestrians.

turned off. ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
▷ The LED goes out. because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
Warning with braking function ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
Functional limitations
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the The system may not be fully functional or may
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. not be available in the following situations:
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ The system may not be fully functional in the
nal sounds. following situations:
Intervene immediately by braking or make an fall.
evasive maneuver. ▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
Braking intervention
deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
116
Safety Controls
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the front Overview

windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ Button in the vehicle
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning Intelligent Safety button
The concept
Camera
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
turn signal is set before leaving the lane. view mirror.
Information terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the Switching on/off
personal responsibility to correctly assess
route and traffic situation. There is risk of an Switching on automatically
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic The lane departure warning is automatically
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively activated after departure, if the function was
interfere in the respective situations. In the switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
event of a warning, do not unnecessarily jerk ped.
the steering wheel.◀
Switching on/off manually
117
Controls Safety
cording to their respective set‐ ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

tings. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐ ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
tive to their individual settings. markings such as in construction areas.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
stored for the profile currently used. ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
Press button again:
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are objects.
activated.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
▷ The LED lights up green. front of you.
Hold down button: ▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
turned off. rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking Brake force display
was detected and warnings can be
issued. The concept
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐ brake lights light up.
tions:
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. brake lights light up in addition.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal. Attentiveness assistant
System limits The concept
The system may not be fully functional in the The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐
following situations: ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
118
Safety Controls
notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this System limits

situation, it is recommended that the driver The function may be limited in the following
takes a break. situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
Information
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
WARNING ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
The system does not relieve from the about 43 mph/70 km/h.
personal responsibility to correctly assess ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
one's physical state. An increasing lack of rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not
be detected in time. There is risk of an acci‐ ▷ In active driving situations, such as when
dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and changing lanes frequently.
alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐ ▷ When the road surface is poor.
ditions.◀ ▷ In the event of strong side winds.
Function
The system is activated each time the engine PostCrash
is started and cannot be switched off. In the event of an accident, the system can
After travel has begun, the system is trained bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐
about the driver, so that increasing lack of tervention by the driver in certain situations.
alertness or fatigue can be detected. This can reduce the risk of a further collision
This procedure takes the following criteria into and the consequences thereof.
account: Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐ hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
ior. braking. Destepping on the gas pedal also in‐
terrupts automatic braking.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐
system is active and can display a recommen‐
ing.
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
119
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options gins to spin, because of loose road surface,
e.g., and automatically brakes it.
The driving force is diverted to the wheel with
better traction.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to As a result, the engine force is transferred
the selected options or country versions. This more efficiently to the wheels during accelera‐
also applies to safety-related functions and tions.
respective features and systems. DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Anti-lock Braking System The concept
ABS DSC prevents traction loss in the power
wheels when driving off and accelerating.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within
The vehicle contains its steering power even
the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐
during full brake applications, thus increasing
cle on a steady course by reducing engine
active safety.
speed and by applying brakes to the individual
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ wheels.
gine.
Information
Adapt your driving style to the situation, for an
Brake assistant appropriate driving style is always the respon‐
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system sibility of the driver.
automatically produces the greatest possible The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ even with DSC.
tance to a minimum during emergency stop. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided margin by driving in a risky manner.
by ABS.
WARNING
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop. When driving with roof load, e.g. with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
Automatic Differential Brake to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
The system controls the driving force by auto‐ deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
matic braking intervention on individual when driving with roof load.◀
wheels. The function corresponds to a differ‐
ential lock: the system detects if a wheel be‐
120
Driving stability control systems Controls
Overview Indicator/warning lights

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
Button in the vehicle played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation
occurs in the following situations:
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
DSC OFF button TION or DSC OFF mode.
Indicator/warning lights DTC Dynamic Traction

The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ Control
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has The concept
failed. The DTC system is a version of the DSC where
forward momentum is optimized.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
General information e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability.
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
in curves. provides maximum traction. Driving stability is
limited during acceleration and when driving in
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
curves.
again as soon as possible.
Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
Deactivating DSC You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐ under the following special circumstances:
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ snow-covered roads.
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. ▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
The DSC system is switched off. driving off from loose grounds.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
121
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
Traction Control walking speed.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at
Activating DTC speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
Press button. driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed
to approx. walking speed and then keeps its
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
speed constant.
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up. As long as there is active braking, the system
is on standby. The system does not brake the
vehicle during this time.
Deactivating DTC
Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever
Press button again. position D or R.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out. Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h
Performance Control using the rocker switch of the cruise control on
Performance Control enhances the agility of the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be
the vehicle. changed by lightly accelerating.
To increase maneuverability, with a corre‐
spondingly sporty driving style, wheels are
braked individually. The resulting braking
power is simultaneously largely compensated
by an engine intervention.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC ▷ Press the rocker switch up to the point of
further optimize traction and driving dynamics. resistance: the speed increases gradually.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐ ▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear of resistance: the speed increases while
axles as demanded by the driving situation and the rocker switch is pressed.
road surface.
▷ Press the rocker switch down to the point
of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐
ally.
HDC Hill Descent Control
▷ Press the rocker switch down past the
point of resistance: when driving forward,
The concept
the speed decreases to approx.
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐ 6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed
matically controls vehicle speed on steep decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.
downhill gradients. Without applying the
122
Activating HDC Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics

Control, refer to page 124.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for
more comfort.
Press button; the LED above the button
lights up.
Servotronic
Deactivating HDC The concept
Press button again and the LED goes The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
out. HDC is automatically deactivated quired to turn the wheels in accordance with
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h. the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering
force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐
ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐
Display in the instrument cluster
creases, the assistance of the steering force is
The selected speed is displayed reduced.
in the speedometer.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
▷ Green: the system is actively ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
braking the vehicle. sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐
▷ Orange: the system is on veyed.
standby.
Malfunction
Variable sport steering
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐ The variable sport steering increases the
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated steering angle of the front wheels at large
brake temperatures. steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.
It also varies the force required to turn the
Dynamic Damping Control wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.
This results in a sporty steering response. In
The concept addition, it becomes easier to steer during
The tuning of the suspension can be changed parking and maneuvering.
with the system.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
123
Driving Dynamics Control Configuring SPORT

When the display is activated on the Control
The concept Display, SPORT can be individually configured.
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine- 1. Activating SPORT.
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
2. Select "Configure SPORT".
ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
3. Configure the program.
Overview SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure SPORT"
This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is
activated.
COMFORT
For balanced tuning.
Activating COMFORT
Operating the programs
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
Press button Program FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
SPORT
COMFORT ECO PRO
ECO PRO ECO PRO, refer to page 176, provides consis‐
tent tuning to maximize range.
Activating ECO PRO

SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the steering and Press button repeatedly until ECO
engine control for greater driving agility. PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of
the suspension also changes and SPORT can
be individually configured. Configuring ECO PRO
The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
rently used.
1. Activate ECO PRO.
Activating SPORT 2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Press button repeatedly until SPORT 3. Configure the program.
is displayed in the instrument cluster. This configuration is retrieved when ECO PRO
is activated.
124
Via the iDrive Drive-off assistant

1. "Settings"
This system supports driving off on inclines.
2. "ECO PRO mode" The parking brake is not required.
or
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
1. "Settings" brake.
2. "Driving mode" 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
3. "Configure ECO PRO" out delay.
Configure the program. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
This configuration is retrieved when ECO PRO
is activated. For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐
sions, the possible holding duration amounts
Displays to 2 minutes.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
Program selection is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Display on the Control Display

Program changes can be displayed on the
Control Display.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driving mode info"
125
Controls Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options to reactivate the system. The vehicle acceler‐
ates again.
As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐
erates to the desired speed.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to The speed is also maintained downhill, but
the selected options or country versions. This may not be maintained uphill if engine power is
also applies to safety-related functions and insufficient.
provisions must be observed when using the General information
respective features and systems. Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Camera-based cruise control
with Stop & Go function, Information
ACC WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
The concept personal responsibility to correctly assess the
Use this system to select a desired speed that traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
roads. situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
To the extent possible, the system automati‐ the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
ahead of you. spective situations.◀
A camera on the interior rear view mirror is WARNING

used to detect vehicles driving ahead. An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
vehicle ahead of you can be varied. dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. rolling.
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes against rolling away, observe the following:
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead ▷ Set the parking brake.
begins moving faster. ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and front wheels in the direction of the curb.
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
riod, the system is able to detect this within the the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
given system limits. Your own vehicle will
brake automatically and then accelerate again.
If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again
after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐
celerator pedal or press the appropriate button
126
Driving comfort Controls
Overview Switching on/off and interrupting

cruise control
Buttons on the steering wheel
Switching on
Press but‐ Function
Press button on the steering wheel.
ton
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
ing, refer to page 127. light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 128. Cruise control can be used.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
Resume speed, refer to
switched on if needed.
page 129.
Reduce distance, refer to Switch off

page 128. To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Increase distance, refer to
page 129. Press button on the steering wheel.
Rocker switch.
▷ If active: press twice.
Change/maintain speed, refer
▷ If interrupted: press once.
to page 128.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's
series, optional features and country specifica‐
Interrupting
tions.
Camera
A camera serves to detect vehicles. If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When Dynamic Traction Control DTC is
activated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
view mirror. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
terior rearview mirror clean and clear. ▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐
paired, e.g., by soiling, heavy precipitation
or glare effects from the sun.
127
▷ After a longer stationary period when the When the system is switched on, the current
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the speed is maintained and stored as the desired
system. speed.
Maintaining, storing, and changing the This is displayed in the speedometer and
speed briefly in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 129.
Information DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐ Changing the speed
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
until the desired speed is set.
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀ If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
WARNING road is clear.
Risk of accident due to too high speed ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
differences to other vehicles, e.g. in the follow‐ the point of resistance, the desired speed
ing situations: increases or decreases by approx.
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving 1 mph/1 km/h.
vehicle. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own past the point of resistance, the desired
lane. speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch
action.
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Distance
Maintaining/storing the speed WARNING

Press button.
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
Or: its, braking can be late. There is risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐
tance to the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐
bly by braking.◀
Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
128
The instrument cluster displays the set the brake pedal and it is standing behind an‐
distance. other vehicle:
Increase distance 1. Press button to call up a stored

desired speed.
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
2. Release the brake pedal.
sired distance is set.
3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the
The instrument cluster displays the set RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead
distance. of you drives away.
Changing between cruise control with/

Call up desired speed and distance without distance control
While driving WARNING
Press button with the system inter‐ The system does not react to traffic driv‐
rupted. Desired speed and distance ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
are then continued with these settings. The stored speed. There is risk of accidents or risk
selected speed is briefly displayed in the info of property damage. Adjust the desired speed
display. to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.◀
Changing to Active Cruise Control without dis‐

In the following cases, the stored speed value
tance control:
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off. Press and hold this button, or
▷ When the ignition is switched off.

Press and hold this button.
While standing
The system brought the vehicle to a complete The indicator lamp in the instrument
standstill: cluster lights up.
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
In order to switch back to Active Cruise Con‐
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as trol with distance control, press the button
soon as the vehicle in the camera's range again briefly.
moves off.
After switching, a Check Control message is
▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐ displayed.
tomatic driving off.
To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐ Displays in the instrument cluster
matically, briefly press the accelerator or
press the RES or SET button. Desired speed
Rolling bars in the distance display indicate ▷ The marking lights up green:
that the vehicle in the camera detection range the system is active.
has moved away. ▷ The marking lights up or‐
The system was paused or your vehicle was ange: the system has been
brought to a halt actively through stepping on interrupted.
129
▷ The marking does not light up: the system Symbol flashes orange:
is switched off. The conditions are not adequate for
the system to work.
Brief status display The system was deactivated but applies the
Selected desired speed. brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐ Symbol flashes red and a signal
rently fulfilled. sounds:
You are requested to intervene by
Distance to vehicle ahead of you braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐
ing ahead of you. The system has been interrupted or
distance control is temporarily sup‐
Distance display pressed because the accelerator pedal
is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance 1
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator pedal
Distance 2 is being pressed; a vehicle was de‐
tected.
Distance 3
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
Distance 4 played in the Head-up Display.
This value is set
automatically af‐ System limits
ter the system is
switched on. Speed range
The system can also be activated when sta‐
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
tionary.
away.
The system is best used on well-constructed
ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate
roads.
further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on
the gas, pressing the RES button or rocker The desired speed can be set between
switch. 20 mph/30 km/h and 85 mph/140 km/h.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
uation when using the system.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
130
Detection range Swerving vehicles
The detection capacity of the system and the A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
automatic braking capacity are limited. until it is completely within the same lane as
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not your vehicle.
be detected. If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
WARNING able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
The system does not relieve from the tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
personal responsibility to correctly assess the ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the system requests that the driver intervene
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐ vers, if needed.
WARNING
Deceleration The system does not relieve from the

personal responsibility to correctly assess the
The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
lowing situations:
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
▷ In case of pedestrians, cyclists or similar situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
slow road users. the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
▷ For red traffic lights. traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
▷ For cross traffic. spective situations.◀
▷ For oncoming traffic.

▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
lighting at night.
131
Cornering Weather
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.
by braking, steering or evading.
Malfunction
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ A Check Control message is displayed if the
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive system fails or was automatically deactivated.
into a curve at an appropriate speed. The system may not be fully functional in the
In tight curves the system offers only restricted following situations:
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might ▷ When an object was not correctly de‐
be detected late or not at all. tected.
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the front
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
When you approach a curve the system may ately after vehicle delivery.
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating. After releasing the gas pedal the system
Cruise control
is reactivated and controls speed independ‐
The concept
ently.
The system maintains a preset speed via the
buttons on the steering wheel. The system
Driving away brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off is insufficient.
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines. General information
▷ From behind bumps in the road. Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.
areas.
132
Information Switch off

WARNING WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐ The system does not relieve from the
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐ personal responsibility to correctly assess the
tions: traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
▷ On winding roads. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
▷ In heavy traffic.
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
on a loose road surface. spective situations.◀
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐ Press button on the steering wheel.
stant speed is possible.◀
▷ If active: press twice.
Overview ▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
Buttons on the steering wheel is deleted.
Press button Function Interrupting

Cruise control on, off, pause, When active, press the button on the
refer to page 133. steering wheel.
Store speed, refer to The system is automatically interrupted in the

page 134. following situations:
Resume speed, refer to ▷ When the brakes are applied.
page 134. ▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
Rocker switch: change, hold,
gaged.
store speed, refer to
page 134. ▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
Controls
▷ If DTC Dynamic Traction Control is acti‐
Switching on vated or DSC is deactivated.
Press button on the steering wheel. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If HDC is activated.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
133
Maintaining, storing, and changing the ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
speed the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
Information 1 mph/1 km/h.
WARNING ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐ The maximum speed that can be set de‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀ pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
Maintaining/storing the speed ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
Press button. pressure on the accelerator pedal.
Or: After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Call up desired speed

The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ Displays in the instrument cluster
terrupted.
Indicator lamp
When the system is switched on, the current
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
speed.
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
This is displayed in the speedometer and tem is switched on.
briefly in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 134.
Desired speed
switched on if needed. ▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
Changing the speed ▷ The marking lights up or‐
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly ange: the system has been
until the desired speed is set. interrupted.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the ▷ The marking does not light up: the system
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the is switched off.
road is clear.
134
Brief status display situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust

the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
Selected desired speed.
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
WARNING
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled. Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to
Displays in the Head-up Display physical circumstances. There is risk of injuries
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching
Some system information can also be dis‐
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while
played in the Head-up Display.
PDC is not yet active.◀
PDC Park Distance Control Overview
The concept With front PDC: button in vehicle

PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐
ble - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure
PDC Park Distance Control
the distances from objects.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx. Ultrasound sensors
6 ft/2 m.
PDC sensors on the vehicle.
An acoustic warning is first given with the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m. Functional requirements
▷ When a collision is imminent. To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,
Information bicycle racks.
WARNING ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
The system does not relieve from the To clean: when using high-pressure washers,
personal responsibility to correctly assess the do not spray the sensors for long periods and
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
135
Switching on/off vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
Switching on automatically The shorter the distance to the object, the
PDC switches on automatically in the following shorter the intervals.
situations: If the distance to a detected object is less than
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
when the engine is running. sounded.
The rearview camera also switches on. With front PDC: if objects are located both in
▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obsta‐ front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating
cles are detected behind or in front of the continuous signal is sounded.
vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower The signal tone is switched off, when selector
than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
You may turn off automatic activation: Steptronic transmission.
1. "Settings" Volume
2. "Parking" The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
3. Select setting. entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Settings are stored for the profile currently 1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
used.
2. "Tone"
Automatic deactivation during forward 3. "Volume settings"

travel 4. "PDC"
The system switches off when a certain driving 5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
distance or speed is exceeded. is selected.
Switch the system back on if needed. 6. Press the controller.
With front PDC: switching on/off used.
manually
Press button. Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
▷ On: the LED lights up. be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
Control (PDC) is activated.
button.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
Display colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
Signal tones played, the switch can be made to PDC:
When approaching an object, an intermittent "Rear view camera"
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
136
System limits ▷ In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
Limits of ultrasonic measurement rages.
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under ▷ In automatic car washes.
the following circumstances: ▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ For small children and animals. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. sweeping machines, high pressure steam
coats. cleaners or neon lights.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud ous tone alternating between the front and
machines. rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐
aged or out of position. ger present, the system is again fully func‐
tional.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
Malfunction
treme heat or strong wind.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects. Rearview camera
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo. The concept
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. The rearview camera provides assistance in
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
such as fences. behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can Information
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds. WARNING
False warnings personal responsibility to correctly assess the
PDC may issue a warning under the following traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
conditions even though there is no obstacle Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
within the detection range: tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively interfere in the respective
▷ In heavy rain.
situations.◀
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
137
Overview Switching on/off manually

Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Switching the view via iDrive

Rearview camera With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Camera
Display on the Control Display
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
▷ Parking aid lines
tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt. "Parking aid lines"
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 225. Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
Switching on/off "Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
Automatic deactivation during forward

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
138
Pathway lines Obstacle marking
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐ Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
age of the rearview camera. of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space Their colored margins of the obstacle mark‐
required when parking and maneuvering on ings match the markings of the PDC.
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering Parking using pathway and turning
angle and are continuously adjusted to the radius lines
steering wheel movements.
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
Turning circle lines parking space.
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
on the rearview camera image together with the pathway line covers the corresponding
pathway lines. turning radius line.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
139
Display settings This system assists the driver in parking paral‐

lel to the road.
Brightness Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
With the rearview camera switched on: on both sides of the vehicle.
1. Select the symbol. The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
during the parking procedure.
is reached, and press the controller.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
Contrast acoustic information issued by the PDC, the
parking assistant and, where applicable, the
With the rearview camera switched on:
rearview camera, and react accordingly.
1. Select the symbol. A component of the parking assistant is the
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 135.
is reached, and press the controller.
Information
System limits WARNING
Detection of objects
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
objects such as ledges may not be detected by tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
the system. situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
Assistance functions also take into account the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
data of the PDC. traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to spective situations.◀
page 135.
CAUTION
The objects displayed on the Control Display
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
under certain circumstances are closer than
cle over or onto curbs. There is risk of property
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from
damage. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
the objects on the display.
terfere in the respective situations.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the

Parking assistant Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
The concept
140
Overview Suitable parking space

▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min.
Button in the vehicle length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Regarding the parking procedure

▷ Doors and tailgate closed.
Parking assistant
▷ Parking brake released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
Ultrasound sensors driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button

Press button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search

is indicated on the Control Display.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the side of the vehicle. Parking assistant is activated automatically.
To ensure full functionality:
Switching on with reverse gear
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
Shift into reverse.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
The current status of the parking space search
spray the sensors for long periods and
is indicated on the Control Display.
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.
Switch off
Requirements The system can be deactivated as follows:
For measuring parking spaces ▷ Press button.
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐

▷ Switch off the ignition.
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
141
Display on the Control Display Parking using the parking assistant

WARNING
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Gray: the system is not available. Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
White: the system is available but tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
not activated. closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀
The system is activated.
1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
vate it if needed.
System status
The status of the parking space search is
indicated on the display.
2. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the display.
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side 3. Adjust the parking position yourself if
of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant needed.
is activated and search for parking space
active. Interrupting manually
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
spaces at the edge of the road next to the time:
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant ▷ "Parking Assistant"
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
▷ Press button.
lighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has Interrupting automatically
been taken over by system. The system is interrupted automatically in the
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
▷ Parking space search is always active
he takes over steering.
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match
activated. When the system is deactivated, the instruction on the display.
the displays on the Control Display are ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
shown in gray. 6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
142
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
or the time taken for parking is exceeded. aged or out of position.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
clearances that are too small. high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
▷ When switching to another function on the treme heat or strong wind.
Control Display. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
A Check Control message is displayed. vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
Resume ▷ With moving objects.
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
tinued if needed. ledges or cargo.
To do this, follow the instructions on the dis‐ ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
play.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
System limits
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
No parking assistance Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ move into the blind area of the sensors before
tance in the following situations: or after a continuous tone sounds.
▷ In tight curves. It can happen that parking spaces are detected
that are not suitable or suitable parking spaces
Functional limitations are not detected.
The system may not be fully functional in the
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads. The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
143
Controls Climate control
Climate control
Air conditioner
1 Vent settings 6 Temperature

2 Cooling function 7 Seat heating, right 55
3 Air flow 8 Rear window defroster
4 Air flow display 9 Seat heating, left 55
5 Recirculated-air mode
Climate control functions in detail ▷ Rear window defroster.

▷ Seat heating.
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except
144
Climate control Controls
Switch off With constant recirculated-air mode, the air

quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
Press and hold the left button until the
fogging of the windows increases.
control switches off.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
Temperature needed.
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature. Air flow, manual
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The intensity is indicated through LEDs. The
Cooling function highest level is active when seven LEDs are lit.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
engine running. duced automatically to save battery power.
Press button.
Manual air distribution
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ Turn the wheel to select the de‐
ting, warmed again. sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started. ▷ Windows.
The air conditioner produces condensation ▷ Upper body region.
water, refer to page 171, that will exit from be‐
low the car. ▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐
Recirculated-air mode well.
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ Defrosts windows and removes
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The condensation
system then recirculates the air currently Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐
within the vehicle. crease the air flow and temperature, and, if
needed, use the cooling function.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
Rear window defroster
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. Press button.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply The rear window defroster switches
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ off automatically after a certain period of time.
nently blocked.
For permanent activation, press the button for
Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ the button again.
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
fogging.
145
Microfilter This filter should be replaced during scheduled

In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐ maintenance, refer to page 204, of your vehi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air. cle.
Automatic climate control
1 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐ 10 Cooling function

tion 11 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
2 Temperature, left lated-air mode
3 AUTO program 12 Seat heating, right 55
4 Switching off the system 13 Vent settings
5 Air flow, AUTO intensity 14 Seat heating, left 55
6 Display 15 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
7 SYNC program clear
8 Maximum cooling 16 Rear window defroster
9 Temperature, right
Climate control functions in detail ▷ SYNC program.

▷ Rear window defroster.
Switching the system on/off
▷ Seat heating.
Switching on
Press any button except:
146
Switch off The system is set to the lowest temperature,

optimum air flow and air circulation mode.
Press button.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Temperature
The function is available above an external
Turn the ring to set the desired temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
temperature. engine running.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
AUTO program
The selected temperature is shown on the dis‐
play of the automatic climate control. Press button.
The automatic climate control reaches this Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed ture are controlled automatically.
by increasing the cooling or heating output, Depending on the selected temperature,
and then keeps it constant. AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ The cooling function, refer to page 147, is
just the set temperature. switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Cooling function
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
The car's interior can only be cooled with the trols the program so as to prevent window
engine running. condensation as much as possible.
Press button.
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ Intensity of the AUTO program
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
ting, warmed again. matic intensity control can be changed.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and Press the left or right side of the but‐
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
gine is started. sity.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ The selected intensity is shown on the display
cally with the AUTO program. of the automatic climate control.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 171, devel‐ Automatic recirculated-air control/
ops that exits underneath the vehicle. recirculated-air mode
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
Maximum cooling tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
Press button. rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
147
Press button repeatedly to select an ▷ Upper body region.

operating mode: ▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
sor.
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically.
SYNC program
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ Press button.
manently blocked. The current setting of the temperature
Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ on the driver's side is transferred to the front
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ passenger side.
tain amount of time in order to avoid window The program is switched off if the setting on
fogging. the front passenger side is changed.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the Defrosts windows and removes
fogging of the windows increases. condensation
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the Press button.
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor. Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield. moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
Air flow, manual For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐ side windows as needed.
gram first. Adjust air flow with the program active.
Press the left or right side of the but‐ If the windows are fogged over, you can also
ton: decrease or increase air flow. switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
sor.
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control Rear window defroster
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power. Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
Manual air distribution off automatically after a certain period of time.
Press button repeatedly to select a For permanent activation, press the button for
program: longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press
the button again.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
▷ Windows and footwell. In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
▷ Windows crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
▷ Windows and upper body region. pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
148
This filter should be replaced during scheduled ▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
maintenance, refer to page 204, of your vehi‐ closing of the vents, arrow 2.
cle.
Ventilation Parked-car ventilation

The concept
Front ventilation
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing two preset reel-on times. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1. On the Control Display:
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the 1. "Settings"

vents continuously, arrows 2. 2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
Adjusting the ventilation The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
▷ Ventilation for cooling: trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
interior is too hot. Preselecting the reel-on time
▷ Draft-free ventilation: On the Control Display:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. 1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
Ventilation in the rear
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the reel-on time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
arrow 1. trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐
vated.
149
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐

trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
150
Interior equipment Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Compatibility
This chapter describes all standard, country- If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
specific and optional features offered with the ing or in the instructions of the system
series. It also describes features that are not to be controlled, the system is gener‐
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ally compatible with the universal garage door
the selected options or country versions. This opener.
also applies to safety-related functions and If you have any questions, please contact:
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
provisions must be observed when using the fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex

Universal Integrated Remote Corporation.
Control
Controls on the interior rearview
The concept mirror
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
▷ LED, arrow 1.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
functions for the sake of security.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
Information quired for programming.
WARNING
Programming
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
General information
door, using the universal garage door opener.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
age. Make sure that the area of movement of 2. Initial setup:
the respective system is clear during program‐ Press and hold the left and right button on
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐ the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀ for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
151
Controls Interior equipment
erases all programming of the buttons on rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
the interior rearview mirror. stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ features an alternating-code system. Flashing
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior peat for approximately 20 seconds.
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ For systems with an alternating-code system,
pends on the manual transmitter. the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button tem also have to be synchronized.
of the desired function on the hand-held Please read the operating manual to find out
transmitter and the button to be program‐ how to synchronize the system.
med on the interior rearview mirror. The Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ ond person.
gin flashing slowly.
To synchronize:
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system.
rior rearview mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior
If the LED does not flash faster after at rearview mirror as described.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
tween the interior rearview mirror and the on the system being programmed. You
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐ 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
ces may be necessary. Wait at least interior rearview mirror for approximately
15 seconds between attempts. 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
Canada: if programming with the hand- repeat this step up to three times in order
held transmitter was interrupted, hold to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
down the interior rearview mirror button zation is complete, the programmed func‐
and repeatedly press and release the tion will be carried out.
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds. Reprogramming individual buttons
6. To program other functions on other but‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ button to be programmed.
rior rearview mirror buttons. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
Special feature of the alternating- transmitter for the system to be controlled
code wireless system approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
If you are unable to operate the system after buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The
repeated programming, please check if the required distance depends on the manual
system to be controlled features an alternat‐ transmitter.
ing-code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
152
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
mitter. functions cannot be deleted individually.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that Digital compass
the button on the interior rearview mirror
has been programmed. The system can Overview
then be controlled by the button on the in‐
terior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button 1 Control button
and repeatedly press and release the
2 Mirror display
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
Mirror display
Controls The point of the compass is displayed in the
WARNING mirror when driving straight.

Operating concept
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
door, using the universal garage door opener. Various functions can be called up by pressing
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐ the control button with a pointed object, such
age. Make sure that the area of movement of as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
the respective system is clear during program‐ The following setting options are displayed in
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐ succession, depending on how long the con‐
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀ trol button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐ ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
view mirror while the engine is running or when ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
the button within receiving range of the system setting.
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted.
Setting the compass zones
Deleting stored functions Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
Press and hold the left and right button on the
fer to World map with compass zones.
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
153
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the
set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
sponds with your location appears in the prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
mirror. on the display. Next, drive in a complete
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ circle at least once at a speed of no more
pass is ready for use again after approximately than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
10 seconds. cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the Left/right-hand steering
event of the following: The digital compass is already set for right or
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. left-hand steering at the factory.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
Setting the language
not change despite changing the direction
of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
button again to switch between English "E"
played.
and German "O".
154
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ rette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g.
mately 10 seconds. by carrying the remote control along when ex‐
iting the vehicle.◀
CAUTION
Sun visor
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
Glare shield can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
Fold the sun visor down or up.
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the in‐
terior lighting switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
The cigarette lighter is located in the center
Opening console.
Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical
The ashtray can be inserted in the cupholder. devices
Information
Emptying
CAUTION
Take out the insert.
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
Lighter can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12V on-board network
WARNING can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
Contact with hot heating elements or the property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the terminals in the engine compartment.◀
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
155
CAUTION Rear center console

If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ Remove the cover.
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
In the trunk
Information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Front center console
The socket is located on the right side in the

trunk.
USB interface
The concept
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Connection for USB devices with music files
and for importing data, such as for Personal
Profile settings.
Remove the cover.
156
Overview Removing
Rear cover
1. Detach the retaining straps at the tailgate.
2. Pry cover up a bit, arrow 1, and pull out of
the brackets toward the back, arrow 2.
The socket is located between the front seats.
Information
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface. Front cover
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐
ing external devices.
Cargo area
Cargo cover 1. Push cover out of the bracket upward on
both sides, arrow 1.
Information 2. Pull cover out of the bracket toward the
WARNING rear on both sides, arrow 2.
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. Installing
in the event of an accident or during braking Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. The
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐ cargo covers must snap audibly into place on
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐ their respective holders.
rior.◀
Cargo floor panel
General information
General information
The cargo cover is in two parts. This can be re‐
moved to load bulky luggage. The cargo floor panel can be removed to stow
unwieldy luggage.
157
Opening the cargo floor panel Inserting the cargo floor panel
1. Insert the cargo floor panel on the back
side of the rear seat backrests.
2. Close the cargo floor panel.
Make sure that the cargo floor panel is en‐
gaged.
Enlarging the trunk
The concept
To open the cargo floor panel, lift slightly and The trunk can be enlarged by adjusting the
push toward the front. loading position or folding back the rear seat
backrests.
Raising cargo floor panel
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
The cargo floor panel can be raised in two po‐ 40–20–40. The sides and the middle section
sitions. can be folded down separately.
Information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest is clear prior to
folding down.◀
Push cargo floor panel forward to the stop. WARNING

The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
Push cargo floor panel all the way forward up straints or remove them.◀
to the seat.
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
Removing the trunk floor load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g.
1. Open the cargo floor panel. in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
2. Lift the cargo floor panel out with both neuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that
hands.
158
the backrest engages into the locking after Manually folding down rear seat
folding it back.◀ backrest
WARNING
while driving may occur due to unintentional
There is risk of injuries. Do not fasten any ob‐
rests.◀
CAUTION
Vehicle parts can be damaged when Pull the strap. The backrest folds forward.
folding down the rear backrest. There is risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of Electrically folding back the rear seat
movement of the rear backrest including head backrest
restraint is clear when folding down.◀
Loading position
The concept
To expand the trunk, the rear seat backrest
can be moved into a vertical position.
The seat backrests can be individually ad‐
justed in several angles of incline.
Pull the switch inside the trunk.
Adjusting the loading position
Left switch: left and center backrest fold for‐
ward together.
Right switch: right backrest folds forward.
Folding back the backrest

Fold the backrest all the way back and until it
engages.
Pull the strap and relieve pressure on the back‐ Ski and snowboard bag
rest as necessary.
General information
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the trunk.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.
159
Controls Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐
rest, refer to page 161.
▷ Cupholders, refer to page 162.
series. It also describes features that are not ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to console, refer to page 162.
the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Storage compartments in the trunk, refer
also applies to safety-related functions and to page 163
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Additional storage compartments in the
provisions must be observed when using the vehicle's interior, refer to page 163
Storage compartment up
Information front in the center console
WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐
rior.◀
CAUTION
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
There is a storage compartment under the
damage the dashboard. There is risk of prop‐
cover.
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments in the Glove compartment

car's interior Front passenger side
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior: Information
▷ Storage compartment up front in the cen‐ WARNING
ter console, refer to page 160.
Folded open, the glove compartment
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
side, refer to page 160. glove compartment can be thrown into the
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
refer to page 161. an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 161.
160
Storage compartments Controls
the glove compartment immediately after us‐ Opening

ing it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Pull the handle.
Fold cover closed.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Compartments in the doors
Closing WARNING
Fold cover closed.
Breakable object, e.g. glass bottle, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
Driver's side can be scattered in the car's interior. There is
risk of injuries. Do not stow any breakable ob‐
Information jects in the car's interior.◀
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the Center armrest
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of Front
an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐ A storage compartment is located in the center
neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close armrest between the front seats.
the glove compartment immediately after us‐
ing it.◀
161
Opening Cupholders
Information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injuries in the event of
an accident. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the center arm hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
rest up, arrow 2. cup holder.◀
Adjusting Front
The center armrest can be adjusted in several
tilt settings.
Rear
The rear center armrest contains a storage
compartment.
Opening
Two cupholders are located under the cover.
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

Pull the cover up.
Storage compartment in the

rear center console Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest. To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
162
CAUTION Net for storage compartment

With an open cup holder, the center arm‐ Smaller objects can be stored in the net of
rest cannot be folded back up. There is risk of right storage compartment.
property damage. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.◀ Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multifunction hooks
Additional storage can lead to a danger of objects flying about
compartments in the during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
vehicle's interior is risk of injuries and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shopping
Storage compartment under the bags, from the multifunction hooks. Only
driver's and front passenger seat transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has
been appropriately secured.◀
Storage compartment for small objects.

A multi-function hook is located on each side
Net in the floor area of the front of the trunk.
passenger
Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the Retaining strap
left side of the passenger foot area.
A retaining strap is available on the left side
trim for fastening small objects.
Nets on the backrests of the front
seats
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
The nets on the backrests of the front seats
To secure the cargo, refer to page 173, there
can also be used to store small parts.
are four lashing eyes in the trunk.
Storage compartments in the

trunk
Side storage compartments, left and
right
Storage compartments are located on the left
and right sides.
163
Storage space under cargo floor panel
The cargo floor panel can be folded. To open

the cargo floor panel, lift slightly and push to‐
ward the front.
164
165
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
also applies to safety-related functions and Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
systems. The respectively applicable country prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
provisions must be observed when using the formance between brake discs and brake
respective features and systems. pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
riod.
Breaking-in period Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
General information served if any of the components above-men‐
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
other (break-in time). vehicle's operating life.
The following instructions will help accomplish

a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Driving on poor roads
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 80. The vehicle combines all-wheel drive with the
advantages of a normal automobile.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive CAUTION
Objects in unpaved areas, e.g. stones or
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
branches, can damage the vehicle. There is
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road risk of property damage. Do not drive on un‐
speed: paved terrain.◀
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
For your own safety, for the safety of passen‐
100 mph/160 km/h.
gers and of the vehicle, heed the following
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ points:
stances.
▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before
starting a trip; do not take risks in driving.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface con‐
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
ditions. The steeper and more uneven the
increased.
road surface, the slower the speed should
be.
Tires
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
near the MAX mark.
168
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent tible materials, such as leaves or grass, come
Control HDC, refer to page 122. in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in system, these materials can ignite. There is
contact with the ground. risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
The ground clearance is no more than 7.8 Do not remove the heat shields installed and
inches/20 cm and can vary according to never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
the vehicle's load. that no combustible materials can come in
contact with hot vehicle parts in driving opera‐
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the
tion, idle or during parking. Do not touch the
accelerator so that driving stability control
hot exhaust system.◀
systems can distribute the driving force to
the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Trac‐
tion Control if available. Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
After a trip on poor roads WARNING
After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
tires for damage to maintain driving safety. can influence one another. There is radiation
Clear heavy soiling from the body. due to the send operations of mobile phones.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. If possible, in the car's interior use only
General driving notes mobile phones with direct connections to an
exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
Closing the tailgate disturbance and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.◀
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other Hydroplaning
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐ form between the tires and road surface.
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
the vehicle interior. There is risk of injuries or ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the loss of contact between the tires and the road
tailgate open.◀ surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
Driving through water
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
CAUTION
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
When driving too quickly through too
▷ Drive moderately.
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
Hot exhaust system
transmission. There is risk of property damage.
WARNING When driving through water, do not exceed the
During driving operation, high tempera‐ maximum indicated water level and the maxi‐
tures can occur underneath the body, e.g. mum speed for driving through water.◀
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combus‐
169
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Drive through calm water only and only if it is The heat generated in this process helps dry
not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this the brake discs and pads.
height, no faster than walking speed, up to In this way braking efficiency will be available
3 mph/5 km/h. when you need it.
Braking safely Hills

Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
WARNING
ard feature.
Light but consistent brake pressure can
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
way of braking in situations needed.
and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐ the brake system.◀
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from WARNING
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its In idle or with the engine switched off,
active mode. safety-relevant functions are restricted or not
In certain braking situations, the perforated available anymore, e.g. braking effect of the
brake discs can cause functional problems. engine or braking force and steering support.
However, this has no effect on the perform‐ There is risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle
ance and operational reliability of the brake. or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the

Objects in the movement area around gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
pedals and floor area wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
WARNING brake efficiency.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit You can increase the engine's braking effect
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in if needed.
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use Brake disc corrosion
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol‐
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor lowing circumstances:
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ ▷ Low mileage.
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
used at all.
moved, e.g. for cleaning.◀
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Driving in wet conditions Corrosion will built up when the maximum
pressure applied to the brake pads during
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
press brake pedal ever so gently every few
cleaned.
miles.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
Ensure that this action does not endanger
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
other traffic.
sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
170
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Condensation under the parked

vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops collecting under‐
neath the vehicle.
These traces of water under the vehicle are
normal.
171
Driving tips Loading
Loading
Vehicle features and options Determining the load limit
This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
specific and optional features offered with the hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
Information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally, and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. There is risk of
an accident. Pay attention to the permitted
2. Determine the combined weight of the
load capacity of the tires and never exceed the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
permitted gross weight.◀
your vehicle.
CAUTION 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐ and passengers from XXX kilograms or
age. There is risk of property damage. Make YYY pounds.
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀ 4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
WARNING pacity.
Loose objects in the car's interior can be For example, if the YYY amount equals
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
in the event of an accident or during braking passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐ is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
rior.◀ 400 lbs.
WARNING 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
while driving may occur due to unintentional
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
There is risk of injuries. Do not fasten any ob‐
rests.◀
172
Loading Driving tips
Load Securing cargo

Lashing eyes in the cargo area
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the To secure the cargo there are four lashing
less cargo that can be transported. eyes in the cargo area.
Securing cargo
Stowing cargo WARNING
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the Improperly stowed objects can shift and
cargo. be thrown into the car's interior, e.g. in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
and injured. There is risk of injuries. Stow and
the rear passenger seat backrests.
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
belts in the opposite buckle. taining straps or draw straps.
▷ If necessary, fold down the backrests to ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
stow cargo. cargo straps.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or
the backrests. draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk.
Roof-mounted luggage rack

Information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
173
Driving tips Loading
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
174
Saving fuel Driving tips
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Close the windows and glass
This chapter describes all standard, country- sunroof
specific and optional features offered with the Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
series. It also describes features that are not open results in increased air resistance and
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
General information sumption.
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ Check the tire inflation pressure
sions. regularly
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
ferent factors. pressure at least twice a month and before
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ starting on a long trip.
erate driving style and regular maintenance, Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ronmental impact. tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo Drive away immediately

Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Remove attached parts This is the quickest way of warming the cold
following use engine up to operating temperature.
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage

racks which are no longer required following
use.
Look well ahead when
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
driving
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
175
Driving tips Saving fuel
Avoid high engine speeds road conditions, maintenance or environmental

factors.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐ Switch off any functions that
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When are not currently needed
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds. Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
and-go traffic.
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed. Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of
the vehicle, refer to page 88. The ECO PRO driving program supports the
energy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
Use coasting partially or completely.
When approaching a red light, take your foot

off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to Have maintenance carried
a halt.
out
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll. Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
Switch off the engine during For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 204.
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic ECO PRO
congestion.
The concept
Auto Start/Stop function ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
automatically switches off the engine during a gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐
stop. mate control output, are adjusted.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted The achieved extended range is displayed in
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ the instrument cluster as bonus range.
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ Activate ECO PRO
onds of switching off the engine.
Press button repeatedly until ECO
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ PRO is displayed in the instrument
mined by other factors, such as driving style, cluster.
176
Configuring ECO PRO Display in the instrument cluster
Via the Driving Dynamics Control ECO PRO bonus range

1. Activate ECO PRO. An adjusted driving style helps
2. "Configure ECO PRO" you extend your driving range.
3. Configure the program. This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
Via the iDrive cluster.
1. "Settings" The bonus range is shown in the range display.
2. "ECO PRO mode" The bonus range is automatically reset every
or time the vehicle is refueled.
1. "Settings"
Efficiency display
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO" Display in the instrument cluster
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip

▷ "Tip at:":
Adjust the ECO PRO speed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
The output is reduced once the set ECO
PRO speed is reached.
ECO PRO climate control Display in the instrument cluster with extended
"ECO PRO climate control" range
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption
can be economized.
The mirror heating is made available when out‐
side temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO potential

Shows potential savings with the current set‐ A mark in the efficiency display informs about
tings in percentages. the current driving style.
Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐
celerating.
177
Driving tips Saving fuel
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the

bar's color:
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the blue range.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving
are met.
Information
The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the
instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO
display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
178
179
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.

3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 184, prior to refueling.
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
Closing
1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
Fuel lid clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler WARNING
flap. The retaining strap of the fuel cap be
jammed and crushed during closing. In this
case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and
fuel vapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of
injuries or risk of property damage. Pay atten‐
tion that the retaining strap is not jammed or
crushed when closing the lid.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E. g. in the event of an electrical malfunction.
The release is located in the trunk.
182
Refueling Mobility
Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.

This releases the fuel filler flap. Briefly press
the rear edge of the fuel filler flap, refer to
page 182.
Observe the following when

refueling
CAUTION
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. On contact with painted surfaces, dam‐
age may occur to these surfaces. The
environment is polluted. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid overfilling.◀
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks

off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
183
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options CAUTION
Even small amounts of wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
converter is permanently damaged. There is
risk of property damage. Do not refuel or add
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Leaded gasoline.
provisions must be observed when using the ▷ Metallic additives, e.g. manganese or iron.
respective features and systems. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
Fuel recommendation pair shop.◀
General information Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of

25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐
Depending on the region, many gas stations
ing.
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
winter helps make a cold start easier, e.g. standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
Information CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
CAUTION xx: comply with the current standard in each
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ case.
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐ CAUTION
gine problems, for instance poor engine start-
Wrong fuels can damage the fuel system
up behavior, poor handling and/or poor
and the engine. There is risk of property dam‐
performance. There is risk of property damage.
age. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol
In case of engine problems, switch gas sta‐
percentage than recommended or one with
tions or use a brand name fuel with a higher
other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100.◀
octane rating.◀
Recommended fuel grade

Gasoline
BMW recommends AKI 91.
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used. CAUTION
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is risk of prop‐
184
Fuel Mobility
erty damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not

comply with the minimum quality.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐

ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
185
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
This chapter describes all standard, country- than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
specific and optional features offered with the been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar, 2 psi.
also applies to safety-related functions and For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
systems. The respectively applicable country inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
provisions must be observed when using the Monitor.
respective features and systems. For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure specifications
Safety information The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ page 187, contains all tire inflation pressure
sure influence the following: specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
▷ The service life of the tires. ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
▷ Road safety. manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
▷ Driving comfort. type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
Checking the tire inflation pressure please note the following:
WARNING ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
A tire with low or missing tire inflation ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is risk of an acci‐ Tire inflation pressures up to
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ 100 mph/160 km/h
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g. twice a
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
month and before a long trip.◀
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
emergency wheel in the trunk regularly, and to page 187, and adjust as necessary.
correct it as needed.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.
186
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI
205/60 R 17 93 H 2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36

M+S Std
225/45 R 19 92 W
RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
These pressure values can also be found on T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's M 4.2 / 60
door pillar.
Tire inflation pressures at max.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire inflation pressure values up to WARNING
100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
28i xDrive and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
Tire size Pressure specifications relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
in bar/PSI wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold Tire inflation pressure values over
tires 100 mph/160 km/h
28i xDrive
225/55 R 17 97 H 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32 Without high-speed tuning feature
M+S A/S Std
225/55 R 17 97 W
in bar/PSI
Std/RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H Specifications in
M+S Std/RSC bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 18 95 V
M+S A/S Std/RSC
225/50 R 18 95 W 225/55 R 17 97 H 2.3 / 33 2.3 / 33
Std/RSC M+S A/S Std
225/50 R 18 95 H 225/55 R 17 97 W
M+S RSC Std/RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H
M+S Std/RSC
187
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
225/50 R 18 95 V 2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36 225/45 R 19 92 W 3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44

M+S A/S Std/RSC RSC
225/50 R 18 95 H Emergency Speed up to a max. of
M+S RSC wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
225/50 R 18 95 W T 135/90 R 17 4.2 / 60
Std/RSC 104 M
205/60 R 17 93 H 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39
M+S Std
225/45 R 19 92 W Tire identification marks
RSC
Tire size
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h 245/45 R 18 96 Y
T 135/90 R 17
104 M 4.2 / 60 245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
With high-speed tuning feature R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
in bar/PSI 96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
225/55 R 17 97 W 2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
Std/RSC
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
225/55 R 17 97 H
M+S Std/RSC H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
225/50 R 18 95 V 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
M+S A/S Std/RSC W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
225/50 R 18 95 H Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
M+S RSC
Tire Identification Number
225/50 R 18 95 W
Std/RSC DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115
205/60 R 17 93 H xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
M+S Std xxx: tire size and tire design
0115: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
188
Tire age test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the marked C may have poor traction performance.
1st week of 2015. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
Recommendation and does not include acceleration, cornering,
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
least every 6 years.
Temperature
Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
Quality grades can be found where applicable and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and maximum section width. heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
Temperature A
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
DOT Quality Grades sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Treadwear to a level of performance which all passenger
Traction AA A B C car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Temperature A B C Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these quired by law.
grades.
WARNING
Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
ernment test course. For example, a tire in combination, can cause heat buildup and
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, possible tire failure.◀
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of RSC – Run-flat tires
tires depends upon the actual conditions of Run-flat tires, refer to page 192, are labeled
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ with a circular symbol containing the letters
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ RSC marked on the sidewall.
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
Traction
weather performance than summer tires.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
189
Tire tread ioning between the wheel and the road. Be

careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
Summer tires speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. ▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
Winter tires dency to pull to the left or right.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
0.16 in/4 mm. curbs, road damage, or similar things.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are WARNING
less suitable for winter operation.
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
Minimum tread depth
control. There is risk of an accident. If tire dam‐
age is suspected while driving, immediately re‐
duce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to
the nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
Wear indicators are distributed around the pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ control. There is risk of an accident. Do not re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. pair damaged tires, but have them replaced.◀
They are marked on the side of the tire with

TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Tire damage Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Wheel and tire combination
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
Information
other qualified service center or repair shop
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, about the right wheel/tire combination and
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
190
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair WARNING

the function of a variety of systems such as Retreated tires can have different tire
ABS or DSC. casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ dent. Do not use retreated tires.◀
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel Winter tires
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle Winter tires are recommended for operating on
as soon as possible. winter roads.
WARNING Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
Wheels and tires which are not suitable vide better winter traction than summer tires,
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐ they do not provide the same level of perform‐
cle, e. g. due to contact with the body due to ance as winter tires.
tolerances despite the same official size rating.
There is risk of an accident.◀ Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
Recommended tire brands than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The plate is available from a
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
case of a flat tire. A dealer’s service center or
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
another qualified service center or repair shop
will be glad to answer additional questions at
New tires any time.
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; Rotating wheels between axles
they achieve their full traction potential after a Different wear patterns can occur on the front
break-in time. and rear axles depending on individual driving
Drive conservatively for the first conditions. The tires can be rotated between
200 miles/300 km. the axles to achieve even wear. A dealer’s
Retreaded tires ter or repair shop will be glad to answer addi‐
tional questions at any time. After rotating,
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
check the tire pressure and correct if needed.
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
191
Storage Mobility System

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. The concept
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
grease and fuels. can be sealed quickly to enable continued
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
Run-flat tires inflation pressure.
Label Information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
RSC label on the tire sidewall. ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ that have penetrated the tire.
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐ ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
cial rims. container and apply it to the steering
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to wheel.
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
event of a tire inflation pressure loss. wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportu‐
Follow the instructions for continued driving nity and have them replaced if needed.
with a flat tire.
DANGER
Changing run-flat tires If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. A enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
dealer’s service center or another qualified tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐ less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
swer additional questions at any time. haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
192
Storage Filling the tire with sealant

The Mobility System is located under the 1. Shake the sealant container.
cargo floor panel.
Sealant container
2. Take the connection hose completely out

of the compressor housing. Do not kink the
hose.
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐

tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it
engages audibly.
1 On/off switch
2 Holder for bottle
3 Reduce inflation pressure
4 Inflation pressure dial
5 Compressor
6 Connector/cable for socket
7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom
of the compressor
193
4. Slide the sealing container upright into the 7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ running, switch on the compressor.
ing that it engages audibly.
CAUTION
5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire The compressor can overheat during ex‐
valve of the nonworking wheel. tended operation. There is risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐

nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ reached:
hicle.
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System

1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐
ant container from the wheel.
2. Remove the connection hose from the
sealant container.
194
3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐ 4. Insert the connector into a power socket
nection hose in suitable material to avoid inside the vehicle.
dirtying the trunk.
4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
12 mph/20 km/h. 2.5 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
To correct the tire inflation pressure turned on or the engine running, switch
1. Stop at a suitable location. on the compressor.
2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
valve stem. ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.
3. Attach the connection hose directly to the
compressor.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
195
Use
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/60 R 17
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
196
Engine compartment Mobility
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine comp.
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir
Hood WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
Information dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents can move in the engine compartment
WARNING
with the vehicle switched off, e.g. the cooler
Improperly executed work in the engine fan. There is risk of injuries. Do not reach into
compartment can damage components and the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
lead to a safety risk. There is risk of accidents clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀
or risk of property damage.◀
197
Mobility Engine compartment
CAUTION Indicator/warning lights

Folded-away wipers can be jammed When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
when the hood is opened. There is risk of message is displayed.
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded Closing the hood
down onto the windshield before opening the 1. Let the hood fall from approx. 16 in/40 cm
hood.◀ height, arrow 1.
WARNING The hood must audibly engage on both
sides.
There are protruding parts, e.g. lock
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is risk of
injuries. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk
of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.◀
WARNING 2. If necessary, apply even pressure in the

area of the hood latches, arrows 2, to com‐
Body parts can be jammed on opening pletely secure the hood again.
and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening the hood

1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever

again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
198
Engine oil Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options Electronic oil measurement
Status display
The concept
the selected options or country versions. This The engine oil level is monitored electronically
also applies to safety-related functions and while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
systems. The respectively applicable country play.
provisions must be observed when using the If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
respective features and systems. level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
General information A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
the driving style and driving conditions.
is displayed.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
the following situations, for example:
perform a detailed measurement.
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine. Displaying the engine oil level
▷ Idling of the engine. 1. "Vehicle info"
▷ With use of engine oil types that are not 2. "Vehicle status"
approved. 3. "Engine oil level"
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling. Engine oil level display messages
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil CAUTION
measurement.
A too low engine oil level causes engine
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ damage. There is risk of property damage. Im‐
uring principles: mediately add engine oil.◀
▷ Status display
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
▷ Detailed measurement
CAUTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
service center or repair shop.◀
199
Mobility Engine oil
Different messages appear on the display de‐ Adding engine oil

pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages. Information
If the engine oil level is too low, within the next
CAUTION
125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to
page 200. A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage.
Detailed measurement Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
The concept
CAUTION
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked and displayed via a scale. Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
Gasoline engine:
property damage. Do not add too much engine
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
level, a check control message is displayed. dealer’s service center or another qualified
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ service center or repair shop.◀
creased somewhat.
WARNING
Requirements Operating materials, e.g. oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
▷ Vehicle is on level road.
ents. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in Observe the instructions on the containers.
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐ Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
tor pedal not depressed. eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ erating materials into different bottles. Store
perature. operating materials out of reach of children.◀
Performing a detailed measurement General information

In order to perform a detailed measurement of Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
the engine oil level: played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
1. "Vehicle info" to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
2. "Vehicle status"
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
3. "Measure engine oil level"
cle before engine oil is added.
4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed Overview
via a scale. The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
Time: approx. 1 minute. partment, refer to page 197.
Opening the oil filler neck

1. Opening the hood, refer to page 197
200
Engine oil Mobility
2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise. Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐

ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
3. Add motor oil.
After refilling, perform a detailed measure‐ Alternative engine oil types
ment, refer to page 200.
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
Engine oil types to add added:
Information Gasoline engine

CAUTION API SL or superior oil rating.
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is risk of property damage. Do not use
oil additives.◀
Engine oil change
CAUTION CAUTION
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐ Engine oil that is not changed in timely
tions in the engine or damage it. There is risk fashion can cause increased engine wear and
of property damage. When selecting an engine thus engine damage. There is risk of property
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐ damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
rect viscosity grade.◀ cated in the vehicle.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
the engine. you let the dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
Viscosity grades the motor oil.
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the
engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
SAE 5W-30, 0W-20 or 5W-20.
The viscosity grades 0W-20 and 5W-20 are
only suitable for particular engines.
Suitable engine oil types

Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
201
Mobility Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and options Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
series. It also describes features that are not 1. Let the engine cool.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
the selected options or country versions. This counterclockwise to allow any excess
also applies to safety-related functions and pressure to dissipate, then open it.
Information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
burns. There is risk of injuries. Only open the 3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
WARNING tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is risk of
Adding
injuries and risk of property damage. Avoid the
contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with 1. Let the engine cool.
additives. Do not swallow any additives. Use 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
suitable additives only.◀ counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Coolant level
Overview 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐ to the specified level; do not overfill.
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment.
202
Coolant Mobility
4. Close cap.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
203
Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
for your vehicle.
also applies to safety-related functions and Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
systems. The respectively applicable country control with which the vehicle was driven most
provisions must be observed when using the recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
BMW maintenance system tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
erational reliability of the vehicle. update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
according to the country-specific version. Re‐ crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
Service and Warranty
service center or repair shop. Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Condition Based Service Canadian models
CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
count the driving conditions of your vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ els for additional information on service re‐
nizes the maintenance requirements. quirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
amount of maintenance corresponding to your that maintenance and repair be performed by a
user profile. dealer’s service center or another qualified
Detailed information on service requirements, service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
refer to page 87, can be displayed on the Con‐ lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
trol Display. tained.
204
Maintenance Mobility
Socket for OBD Onboard trol components, in particular the catalytic

converter.
Diagnosis
Information
CAUTION
Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis can lead to vehicle malfunctions.
There is risk of property damage. The manu‐
facturer of your vehicle strongly recommends
access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be
limited to a dealer's service center, another
qualified service center or repair shop or other
authorized persons.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
205
Mobility Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 76, the wiper arms.
series. It also describes features that are not 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the
the selected options or country versions. This wiper blade.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
4. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order

of removal until it locks in place.
5. Fold down the wipers.
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under property damage. Make sure that the wipers
the cargo floor panel. with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Wiper blade replacement

Information Lamp and bulb replacement
CAUTION Information
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐ Lights and bulbs
shield can be damaged. There is risk of prop‐ Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐ tion to vehicle safety.
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
that you have appropriate work performed by a
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here.
206
Replacing components Mobility
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s If despite driving with the lights switched on,
service center or another qualified service cen‐ increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
ter or repair shop. in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐ ter or repair shop.
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is
risk of injuries. Only change bulbs after they Headlight setting
have cooled off.◀
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
WARNING changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
Work on switched-on lighting systems
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
can cause short circuits. There is risk of inju‐
center or another qualified service center or re‐
ries or risk of property damage. When working
pair shop.
on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
Front lights, bulb replacement
CAUTION Halogen headlights

Contaminated bulbs reduce their service
Overview
life. There is risk of property damage. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a
clean cloth or something similar, or hold the
bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
1 High beams, headlight flasher
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. 2 Low beams
WARNING 3 Side marker lights
Too intensive brightness can irritate or 4 Turn signal

damage the retina of the eye. There is risk of 5 Parking lights / daytime running lights
injuries. Do not look directly into the headlights 6 Parking lights / daytime running lights
or other light sources for an extended period of
time. Do not remove the LED covers.◀
Parking lights, daytime running lights
Headlight glass The parking lights and daylight running lights

are made using LED technology.
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When Contact a dealer’s service center or another
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐ qualified service center or repair shop in the
densation evaporates after a short time. The event of a malfunction.
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
207
Accessing the turn signals, low beams, wiper fluid with the screwdriver from the
high beams/headlight flasher onboard vehicle tool kit.
Follow general instructions, refer to page 206.
Open the hood.
Turn signal
Bulb A2357
1. Access to the turn signal on the right side:

unhook and fold away the filler neck for the
wiper fluid with the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit.
2. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐
move.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and

remove.
3. Pull the bulb holder directly to the rear, ar‐
row 1, and remove.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn

counterclockwise and remove.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
5. Install the new bulb with bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
Low beams In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor‐
rectly positioned in the headlight housing
55 watt bulb, H7LL.
and the bulb holder perceptibly engages.
1. Access to the low beams on the right side: 6. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
unhook and fold away the filler neck for the Make sure that the lid engages.
208
High beams/headlight flasher LED headlights

55-watt bulb, H7.
Overview
1. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐
move. Front lights
2. Pull the bulb holder directly to the rear, ar‐ 1 Parking lights / daytime running lights
row 1, and remove.
2 Side marker lights
3 Turn signal
4 Low beams, high beams/headlight flasher
5 Corner-illuminating lights
Front lights
The following lights feature LED technology:
▷ High beams
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. ▷ Parking lights / daytime running lights
4. Install the new bulb with bulb holder in re‐ ▷ Low beams
verse order of removal. ▷ Corner-illuminating lights
In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor‐ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
rectly positioned in the headlight housing qualified service center or repair shop in the
and the bulb holder perceptibly engages. event of a malfunction.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Make sure that the lid engages. Turn signal
Bulb A2357
Accessing the turn signals

Open the hood.
1. Access to the turn signal on the right side:

unhook and fold away the filler neck for the
209
wiper fluid with the screwdriver from the 35-watt bulb, H8.
onboard vehicle tool kit.
1. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, with the flat side on the clip,
arrow 1.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and

remove.
2. Turn the screwdriver by 90°, arrow 2.

3. Remove the front fog lamp toward the
front.
4. Detach the connector.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn

counterclockwise and remove.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
Front fog lights 5. Turn the bulb bracket and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb and replace it.

7. Proceed in reverse order to insert the front
fog lamp. Note the guide rails in doing so.
210
Turn signal in exterior mirror The tail lights feature LED technology. Contact
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature a dealer’s service center or another qualified
LED technology. Contact a dealer’s service service center or repair shop in the event of a
center or another qualified service center or re‐ malfunction.
pair shop in the event of a malfunction.
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lights
Tail lights, bulb replacement
General information
Vehicles with halogen headlights Follow general instructions, refer to page 206.
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.
Outer brake lamp: 21 watt bulb, P21WLL.
Removing the exterior tail lamp

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the fastening using the screw
driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, ar‐
row 1.
Remove cover, arrow 2.
1 Side marker lights
2 Turn signal
3 Reversing lamp
4 Inside brake lamp
5 Tail lights
6 Brake lights/tail lights
Vehicles with LED headlights

3. Loosen both nuts, arrow 1, of the outer tail
lamp.
Carefully pull out the tail lights toward the
front, arrow 2, from the body. Ensure that
the wiring is not damaged.
1 Turn signal
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Tail lights
5 Brake light
4. Pull the plug out of the bulb holder and
have the tail lamp wiring hang outside.
211
Replacing the bulbs Lights in the tailgate

1. Loosen the three fasteners, arrow 1, on the
bulb holder. Vehicles with halogen headlights
Remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp, Follow general instructions, refer to page 206.
arrow 2. Reversing lamp: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL
Inner brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL
Tail light: 5-watt bulb, P21WLL
Vehicles featuring LED headlights

Reversing lamp: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL
Inner brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL
Accessing the lights

2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. 1. Open the tailgate.
▷ Upper bulb: turn signal 2. Pull out the cover at the recessed grip.
▷ Lower bulb: brake light
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Installing the tail lamp

1. Connect the plug and mount the wiring on
the tail lamp, arrow 1.
3. Remove the plug from the bulb holder.
2. Place the tail lamp with the tab, arrow 2, on
the mounting point of the body and push
Replacing reversing lamp and inner brake
onto both of the threaded bolt.
lamp
1. Loosen both fasteners, arrow 1, on the
bulb holder.
Remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp,
arrow 2.
3. Press on the tail lights until flush and

tighten both of the nuts. Mount the cover.
212
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the Jacking points for the vehicle jack
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Upper bulb: reversing lamp
▷ Lower bulb: inner brake lamp
Only vehicles with halogen headlights:
▷ Lower bulb, 5-watt: tail light
Installing the bulb holder

1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
Connect the plug to the bulb holder. cated at the positions shown.
2. Make sure that the bulb holder is correctly
and firmly seated.
Emergency wheel
Central brake lamp and license plate Safety measures
lamp
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
Follow general instructions, refer to page 206. from passing traffic and on solid ground.
These lights are made using LED technology. Switch on the hazard warning system.
Contact a dealer’s service center or another ▷ Set the parking brake and engage lever in
qualified service center or repair shop in the position P P.
event of a malfunction.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
Changing wheels such as behind a guardrail.
Information ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire
priate distance.
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. ▷ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid
and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slip‐
Which is why no spare tire is available.
pery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., the
The tools for changing wheels are available as vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the
accessories from your dealer’s service center side.
or another qualified service center or repair
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
shop.
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine; other‐
wise, a fatal hazard exists.
213
Information jacking point with the entire surface on the

ground.
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is risk of injuries. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
Removing the emergency wheel

The emergency wheel and the tools are lo‐
cated in the trunk under the cargo floor panel.
2. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan‐
gular recess of the jacking point for crank‐
ing it up.
3. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts
off of the ground.
Wheel mounting
Mount one emergency wheel only.
1. Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove
1. Unscrew the wing nut. the wheel.
2. Remove the cover. 2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts.
3. Remove tool holder.
If original BMW light alloy wheels are not
4. Remove emergency wheel.
mounted, any accompanying lug bolts also
have to be used.
Prepare wheel change
3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and
1. Follow the Safety instructions, refer to
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
page 214.
4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle
2. With the wheel chock from the onboard ve‐
jack.
hicle tool kit, also secure the vehicle
against rolling away at the front wheel of
the opposite side. For this, place the wheel
After the wheel change
chock behind the front wheel diagonally 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
across. ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
3. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn. 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the trunk.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
Jacking up the vehicle under the cargo floor panel because of its
1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point size.
closest to the wheel such that the vehicle 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
214
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. Check Control messages of these comfort fea‐
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight tures are no longer displayed.
with a calibrated torque wrench.
Charging the battery
6. Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos‐
sible.
General information
Driving with emergency wheel Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
WARNING remains usable for its full service life.
The emergency wheel has particular di‐ The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency lowing cases:
wheel, changed driving properties may occur
▷ When making frequent short-distance
at higher speeds, e.g. reduced lane stability
drives.
when braking, longer braking distance and
changed self-steering properties in the limit ▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
area. There is risk of an accident. Drive moder‐ riods, longer than a month.
ately and do not exceed a speed of ▷ Steptronic transmission: when parked for
50 mph/80 km/h.◀ long periods of time in selector lever posi‐
tion D, R or N.
Vehicle battery Information

CAUTION
Maintenance Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free. can work with high voltages and currents,
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the which means that the 12V on-board network
service life of the battery. can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
More information about the battery can be re‐
ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
terminals in the engine compartment.◀
Battery replacement Starting aid terminals

CAUTION In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 219, in the
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
engine compartment with the engine off.
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions.There is risk of property damage.
Power failure
Information on the compatible vehicle batteries
is available at your dealer's service center.◀ After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer tings updated, e. g.:
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
battery be registered on the vehicle by a
tions again.
service center or repair shop to ensure that all ▷ Time: update.
comfort features are fully available and that any ▷ Date: update.
215
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to

page 51.
Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse
and do not replace a nonworking fuse with a
substitute of another color or amperage rat‐
ing.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse

types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the glove compartment.
In the glove compartment
Swing the cover down, arrow.
216
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Overview

SOS button in the roofliner
Hazard warning flashers Requirements

▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
The button is located in the center console. button lights up green.
▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
Request was initiated.
Intelligent Emergency If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
the Emergency Request can be aborted.
Request
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
The concept until the voice connection has been estab‐
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ lished.
quest can be made through this system. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
General information established.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. When the emergency request is received
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐ Response Center contacts you and takes
ditions. further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
217
Mobility Breakdown assistance
steps to help you under certain circum‐ Check the expiration dates of the contents
stances. regularly and replace any expired items
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW promptly.
Response Center which serve to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g. Storage
the current position of the vehicle, if it can The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area on
be established. the left in the storage compartment.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still Jump-starting
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
General information
Initiating an Emergency Request If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
automatically started using the battery of another vehicle
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS Information
button. DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is risk of injuries or
Warning triangle danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
To prevent personal injury or damage to both

vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Preparation
CAUTION
In the case of body contact between the
The warning triangle is located on the inside of two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
the tailgate. jump-starting. There is risk of property dam‐
Move the warning triangle sideways and re‐ age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
move it. 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
First-aid kit 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
Information 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
Some of the articles have a limited service life. consumers in both vehicles.
218
Starting aid terminals battery, or to the corresponding starting

aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
WARNING
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
If the jumper cables are connected in the
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
incorrect order, sparks formation can occur.
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to the
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
correct order during connection.◀
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
tive terminal. started in the usual way.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.
A special nut serves as the negative terminal of

Tow-starting and towing
the battery.
Information
WARNING
Connecting the cables
Due to system limits, individual functions
1. Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
minal.
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the ing function. There is risk of an accident.
battery, or to the corresponding starting Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐ tow-starting/towing.◀
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
219
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Steptronic transmission without Tow truck

xDrive: transporting your vehicle
Information
Your vehicle must not be towed if the front
wheels are touching the ground.
CAUTION
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is
risk of property damage. Have vehicle trans‐
ported only with lifted front axle or on a loading Have your vehicle transported on a flatbed sur‐
platform.◀ face only
CAUTION
Tow truck When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐

sitioning the vehicle.
Towing other vehicles
Information
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. WARNING
CAUTION If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐
sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make sure
age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀
Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐
sitioning the vehicle. CAUTION
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
Steptronic transmission with xDrive: correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
transporting your vehicle occur. There is risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
Information fitting.◀
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
220
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ Information

dow.
CAUTION
Tow bar If the tow fitting is not used as intended,

there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
The tow fittings used should be on the same
tow fitting. There is risk of property damage.
side on both vehicles.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe Use of the tow fitting:
the following: ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going vehicle and screw it all the way in.
around corners. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it roads only.
is secured with an offset. ▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
positioning the vehicle.
Tow rope ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses Screw thread for tow fitting
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Tow fitting
General information
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
ried in the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front the Steptronic transmission.
or rear of the BMW. Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 206, are together in the cargo
area.
221
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle features and options ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 inches/80 cm.
specific and optional features offered with the Automatic car washes
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Information
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
respective features and systems. ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
Car washes may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
General information ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
Regularly remove foreign objects such as page 75, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
leaves in the area below the windshield when vation.
the hood is raised. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in be triggered by the interior motion sensor
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
age the vehicle. tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
refer to page 47.
Steam blaster and high-pressure CAUTION
washer
Too high guide rails in car washes can
damage body parts. There is risk of property
Information
damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails
CAUTION higher than 4 in/10 cm.◀
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the Before driving into a car wash
pressure or temperatures being too high.
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
There is risk of property damage. Maintain suf‐
car wash, take the following steps:
ficient distance and do not spray too long con‐
tinuously. Follow the user's manual for the Steptronic transmission:
high-pressure washer.◀ 1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
Distances and temperature
3. Make sure that the parking brake is re‐
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. leased.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, 4. Switch the engine off.
seals: 12 in/30 cm.
222
Care Mobility
In this way, the ignition remains switched products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
on, and two Check-Control messages are low the instructions on the container.◀
displayed.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside Vehicle paint
when in selector lever position N. A signal Regular care contributes to driving safety and
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the value retention. Environmental influences in
vehicle. areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐ taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
sion: fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
1. Depress the brake pedal.
influences.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
Headlights mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or tered or discolored.
acidic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., Leather care
from insects, with shampoo and wash off Remove dust from the leather often, using a
with water. cloth or vacuum cleaner.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
ice scraper. chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
After washing the vehicle surface.
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes To guard against discoloration, such as from
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action clothing, provide leather care roughly every
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake two months.
discs can occur.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
Completely remove all residues on the win‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to more visible.
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
wiper blade wear.
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from a
Vehicle care dealer’s service center or another qualified
Car care products
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends Upholstery material care
using car care and cleaning products from
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
BMW.
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
WARNING
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
Cleansers can contain substances that with a suitable interior cleaner.
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is risk of injuries. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
223
Mobility Care
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using Plastic components

large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the These include:
material vigorously.
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
CAUTION ▷ Roofliner.
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of ▷ Lamp lenses.
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐ ▷ Instrument cluster cover.
cro® fasteners are closed.◀ ▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Caring for special components Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Light-alloy wheels
Do not soak the roofliner.
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. CAUTION
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
turer's instructions. grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents plastic parts. There is risk of property damage.
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth
components, such as the brake disk. lightly with water.◀
Chrome surfaces Safety belts

Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply thus have a negative impact on safety.
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road WARNING
salt. Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
Rubber components of the safety belts. There is risk of injuries or
Environmental influences can cause surface danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. For for cleaning the safety belts.◀
cleaning, use only water and suitable care Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
products, the manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐ belts clipped into their buckles.
ommends original BMW care products.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber belts until they are dry.
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing Carpets and floor mats
car care products in order to avoid damage or
noises. WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
Fine wood parts the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a the vehicle such that they are secured and
soft cloth. cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
224
Care Mobility
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and

can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g. for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐

rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/Screens/protective glass of
the Head-up Display
CAUTION
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is risk of property damage.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.◀
CAUTION
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
Long-term
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
225
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
Information
The technical data and specifications in this found in the approval documents, on labels on
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, service center or another qualified service cen‐
for example, due to the selected special equip‐ ter or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific The information in the vehicle documents al‐
measurement method. Detailed values can be ways has priority.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
model version, equipment or country-specific for example, due to the selected special equip‐
measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
BMW X1
Width with mirrors inches/mm 81.1/2,060
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.7/1,821
Height inches/mm 62.9/1,598
Length inches/mm 175.4/4,455
Wheelbase inches/mm 105.1/2,670
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.4/11.4
228
Technical data Reference
Weights
xDrive28i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,720/2,141
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,470/1,120
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,375/1,077
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 27.1-58.7/505-1,550
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 13.5/51 Fuel quality, refer to

page 184
Larger fuel tank, approx. 16.1/61 Fuel quality, refer to

page 184
229
Reference Appendix
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Active pedestrian protection

system
Opposite to the description in this Owner's
Manual, the active pedestrian protection sys‐
tem is only deployed at speeds between ap‐
prox. 30 km/h/approx. 18 mph and 55 km/h/
34 mph.
Speed limit detection

Opposite to the description in this Owner's
Manual, the display cannot be switched on/off
via iDrive.
230
Appendix Reference
231
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A All around the steering AUTO program, automatic cli‐
wheel 14 mate control 147
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All-season tires, see Winter AUTO program, intensity 147
tem 120 tires 191 Auto Start/Stop function 70
ACC, Active Cruise Con‐ All-wheel-drive 122 Average fuel consumption 91
trol 126 Alternating-code hand-held Average speed 91
Acceleration Assistant, refer transmitter 152 Axle loads, weights 229
to Launch Control 80 Alternative oil types 201
Accessories and parts 7 Ambient light 101 B
Activated-charcoal filter 148 Antifreeze, washer fluid 76
Active cruise control, Antilock Brake System, Backrest curvature, refer to
ACC 126 ABS 120 Lumbar support 54
Adaptive brake lights, see Anti-slip control, see Backrest, seats 52
Brake force display 118 DSC 120 Backrest, width 54
Additives, oil 201 Approved axle load 229 Bad road trips 168
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Arrival time 91 Band-aids, see First-aid
straints 52 Ashtray 155 kit 218
After washing vehicle 223 Assistance when driving Bar for tow-starting/
Airbags 102 off 125 towing 220
Airbags, indicator/warning Assist system, see Intelligent Battery replacement, vehicle
light 103 Safety 111 battery 215
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Attentiveness assistant 118 Battery replacement, vehicle
culated-air mode 147 AUTO intensity 147 remote control 35
Air circulation, see Recircu‐ Automatic car wash 222 Battery, vehicle 215
lated-air mode 145 Automatic climate con‐ Belts, safety belts 56
Air conditioner 144 trol 146 Beverage holder, cu‐
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐ Automatic cruise control with pholder 162
ing function 145, 147 Stop & Go 126 BMW Assist 6
Air distribution, Automatic Curb Monitor 61 BMW Driver’s Guide App 6
manual 145, 148 Automatic deactivation, BMW Homepage 6
Air flow, air conditioner 145 Front-seat passenger air‐ BMW Internet page 6
Air flow, automatic climate bags 104 BMW maintenance sys‐
control 148 Automatic headlight con‐ tem 204
Air pressure, tires 186 trol 98 Bonus range, ECO PRO 177
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ Automatic locking 46 Bottle holder, see Cu‐
tion 149 Automatic recirculated-air pholder 162
Alarm system 46 control 147 Brake assistant 120
Alarm, unintentional 47 Automatic tailgate 41 Brake discs, break-in 168
All around the center con‐ Automatic transmission, see Brake force display 118
sole 16 Steptronic transmission 77 Brake lights, adaptive 118
All around the roofliner 17
232
Everything from A to Z Reference
Brake lights, brake force dis‐ Catalytic converter, see Hot Combination switch, see
play 118 exhaust system 169 Wiper system 74
Brake pads, break-in 168 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Comfort Access 43
Braking, hints 170 ice 204 COMFORT program, Dy‐
Breakdown assistance 217 Center armrest 161 namic Driving Control 124
Break-in 168 Center console 16 Compact wheel, see Emer‐
Brightness of Control Dis‐ Central locking system 40 gency wheel 213
play 94 Central screen, see Control Compartments in the
Bulb replacement 206 Display 18 doors 161
Bulb replacement, front 207 Changes, technical, see Own Compass 153
Bulb replacement, rear 211 Safety 7 Compressor 192
Bulbs and lights 206 Changing parts 206 Condensation on win‐
Button, Start/Stop 68 Changing wheels 213 dows 148
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐ Changing wheels/tires 190 Condensation under the vehi‐
ing 218 Chassis number, see vehicle cle 171
identification number 10 Condition Based Service
C Check Control 82 CBS 204
Checking the oil level elec‐ Confirmation signal 46
California Proposition 65 tronically 199 ConnectedDrive 6
Warning 8 Children, seating position 64 ConnectedDrive Services 6
Camera-based cruise control, Children, transporting Connecting electrical devi‐
ACC 126 safely 64 ces 155
Camera lenses, care 225 Child restraint fixing sys‐ Continued driving with a flat
Camera, rearview cam‐ tem 64 tire 107, 110
era 138 Child restraint fixing system Control Display 18
Can holder, see Cu‐ LATCH 66 Control Display, settings 93
pholder 162 Child restraint fixing systems, Controller 19
Car battery 215 mounting 65 Control systems, driving sta‐
Car care products 223 Child safety locks 67 bility 120
Care, displays 225 Child seat, mounting 65 Convenient opening with the
Care, vehicle 223 Child seats 64 remote control 38
Cargo 172 Chrome parts, care 224 Coolant 202
Cargo area 157 Cigarette lighter 155 Cooling function 145, 147
Cargo area, enlarging 158 Cleaning displays 225 Cooling, maximum 147
Cargo area, storage compart‐ Climate control 144, 146 Cooling system 202
ments 163 Clock 86 Cornering lamp 99
Cargo floor panel 157 Closing/opening via door Corrosion on brake discs 170
Cargo position, rear seat lock 39 Cosmetic mirror 155
backrest 159 Closing/opening with remote Courtesy lamps during un‐
Cargo, securing 173 control 37 locking 37
Cargo straps, securing Closing the tailgate with no- Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐
cargo 173 touch activation 44 cle locked 38
Car key, see Remote con‐ Cockpit 14 Cruise control 132
trol 34 Combination switch, see Turn Cruise control, active 126
Carpet, care 224 signals 73
Car wash 222
233
Cruise control, refer to cam‐ Door lock 39 Emergency detection, remote

era-based cruise con‐ Door lock, see Remote con‐ control 35
trol 126 trol 34 Emergency release, fuel filler
Cruising range 86 Downhill control 122 flap 182
Cupholder 162 Drive-off assistant 125 Emergency Request 217
Current fuel consumption 87 Drive-off assistant, see Emergency start function, en‐
DSC 120 gine start 35
D Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency wheel 213
trol 124 Energy Control 87
Damage, tires 190 Driving Excitement, Energy recovery 87
Damping control, dy‐ SPORT 92 Engine, automatic Start/Stop
namic 123 Driving instructions, break- function 70
Data, technical 228 in 168 Engine, automatic switch-
Date 86 Driving mode 124 off 70
Daytime running lights 99 Driving notes, general 169 Engine compartment 197
Defrosting, refer to defrosting Driving on bad roads 168 Engine compartment, work‐
the windows 145 Driving stability control sys‐ ing in 197
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐ tems 120 Engine coolant 202
frosting 148 Driving tips 169 Engine oil 199
Defrosting the windows 145 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Engine oil, adding 200
Dehumidifying, air 145, 147 trol 120 Engine oil additives 201
Deleting personal data 24 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Engine oil change 201
Deletion of personal data 24 trol 121 Engine oil filler neck 200
Destination distance 91 Dynamic Damping Con‐ Engine oil types, alterna‐
Digital clock 86 trol 123 tive 201
Digital compass 153 Dynamic Stability Control Engine oil types, suitable 201
Dimensions 228 DSC 120 Engine start during malfunc‐
Dimmable exterior mirrors 62 Dynamic Traction Control tion 35
Dimmable interior rearview DTC 121 Engine start, jump-start‐
mirror 62 ing 218
Direction indicator, see Turn E Engine start, refer to Starting
signals 73 the engine 69
Display, electronic, instru‐ ECO PRO 176 Engine stop 69
ment cluster 81 ECO PRO, bonus range 177 Engine temperature, dis‐
Display, engine tempera‐ ECO PRO display 176 play 91
ture 91 ECO PRO driving mode 176 Entering a car wash 222
Display lighting, see Instru‐ ECO PRO mode 176 Equipment, interior 151
ment lighting 100 ECO PRO program, driving Error displays, see Check
Displays, cleaning 225 dynamics 124 Control 82
Disposal, coolant 203 Electronic displays, instru‐ ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
Disposal, vehicle battery 216 ment cluster 81 gram, see DSC 120
Distance control, see Electronic oil measure‐ Exchanging wheels/tires 190
PDC 135 ment 199 Exhaust system 169
Distance to destination 91 Electronic Stability Program Exterior mirror, automatic
Divided screen view, split ESP, see DSC 120 dimming feature 62
screen 23 Exterior mirrors 60
234
External start 218 Front-seat passenger airbags, Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
External temperature dis‐ indicator lamp 104 ture 98
play 86 Front seats 52 Headlight flasher 74
External temperature warn‐ FTM Flat Tire Monitor 109 Headlight flasher, bulb re‐
ing 86 Fuel 184 placement 209
Eyes for securing cargo 173 Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ Headlight glass 207
age fuel consumption 91 Headlights 207
F Fuel filler flap 182 Headlights, care 223
Fuel gauge 86 Head restraints 52
Failure message, see Check Fuel lid 182 Head restraints, front 58
Control 82 Fuel quality 184 Head restraints, rear 59
False alarm, see Unintentional Fuel recommendation 184 Head-up Display 94
alarm 47 Fuel, tank capacity 229 Head-up Display, care 225
Fan, refer to Air flow 145 Fuse 216 Heavy cargo, stowing 173
Fan, see Air flow 148 High-beam Assistant 99
Filler neck for engine oil 200 G High beams 74
Fine wood, care 224 High beams/low beams, see
First-aid kit 218 Garage door opener, see Uni‐ High-beam Assistant 99
Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐ versal Integrated Remote High beams, bulb replace‐
ting 221 Control 151 ment 209
Flat tire, changing Gasoline 184 Hill Descent Control
wheels 213 Gear change, Steptronic HDC 122
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 109 transmission 77 Hills 170
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Gear shift indicator 88 Hill start assistant, see Drive-
tor TPM 105 General driving notes 169 off assistant 125
Flat tire, warning Glare shield 155 Holder for beverages 162
lamp 106, 109 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐ Homepage 6
Flooding 169 amic glass sunroof 49 Hood 197
Floor carpet, care 224 Glove compartment 160 Horn 14
Floor mats, care 224 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ Hot exhaust system 169
Fogged up windows 145 proved 229 HUD Head-up Display 94
Folding back rear seat back‐ Hydroplaning 169
rests 158 H
Fold-out position, wiper 76 I
Foot brake 170 Halogen headlights 207
Front airbags 102 Handbrake, see Parking Ice warning, see External
Front-end collision warning brake 72 temperature warning 86
with City Braking func‐ Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ Icy roads, see External tem‐
tion 112 nating code 152 perature warning 86
Front fog lights 100 Hazard warning flashers 217 Identification marks, tires 188
Front fog lights, front, bulb re‐ HDC Hill Descent Con‐ Identification number, see ve‐
placement 210 trol 122 hicle identification num‐
Front lights 207 Head airbags 102 ber 10
Front-seat passenger airbags, Headlight control, auto‐ iDrive 18
automatic deactivation 104 matic 98 Ignition key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
235
Ignition off 68 Interior rearview mirror, man‐ Letters and numbers, enter‐
Ignition on 68 ually dimmable 62 ing 25
Indication of a flat Internet page 6 Light 97
tire 106, 109 Interval display, service re‐ Light alloy wheels, care 224
Indicator and alarm lamps, quirements 87 Light-emitting diodes,
see Check Control 82 Interval mode 75 LEDs 207
Indicator lamp, see Check Lighting 97
Control 82 J Lights and bulbs 206
Individual air distribu‐ Light switch 97
tion 145, 148 Jacking points for the vehicle Load 173
Individual settings, see Per‐ jack 213 Loading 172
sonal Profile 35 Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ Loading position 158
Inflation pressure, tires 186 sion 77 Lock, door 39
Inflation pressure warning, Jump-starting 218 Locking/unlocking via door
tires 109 lock 39
Info display, refer to On- K Locking/unlocking with re‐
Board computer 90 mote control 37
Information 6 Key/remote control 34 Locking, automatic 46
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ Locking, settings 45
tor TPM 106 cess 43 Locking via tailgate 41
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor Key Memory, see Personal Lock, power window 49
FTM 109 Profile 35 Locks, doors, and win‐
Instrument cluster 81 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ dows 67
Instrument cluster, electronic mission 77 Low beams 97
displays 81 Knee airbag 103 Low beams, automatic, see
Instrument lighting 100 High-beam Assistant 99
Integrated key 34 L Low beams, bulb replace‐
Integrated Owner's Manual in ment 208
the vehicle 29 Label on recommended Lower back support 54
Intelligent Emergency Re‐ tires 191 Luggage rack, see Roof-
quest 217 Lamp replacement 206 mounted luggage rack 173
Intelligent Safety 111 Lamp replacement, front 207 Lumbar support 54
Intensity, AUTO pro‐ Lamp replacement, rear 211
gram 147 Lane departure warning 117 M
Interior equipment 151 Lane margin, warning 117
Interior lights 100 Language on Control Dis‐ Maintenance 204
Interior lights during unlock‐ play 94 Maintenance require‐
ing 37 Lashing eyes, securing ments 204
Interior lights with the vehicle cargo 173 Maintenance, service require‐
locked 38 LATCH child restraint sys‐ ments 87
Interior motion sensor 47 tem 66 Maintenance system,
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ Launch Control 80 BMW 204
matic dimming feature 62 Leather, care 223 Make-up mirror 155
Interior rearview mirror, com‐ LEDs, light-emitting di‐ Malfunction displays, see
pass 153 odes 207 Check Control 82
236
Manual air distribu‐ Mounting of child restraint Onboard vehicle tool kit 206
tion 145, 148 systems 65 Opening/closing via door
Manual air flow 145, 148 Multifunction steering wheel, lock 39
Manual brake, see Parking buttons 14 Opening and closing 34
brake 72 Multimedia 6 Opening and closing, without
Manual mode, Steptronic remote control 39
transmission 78 N Opening and closing, with re‐
Manual operation, door mote control 37
lock 39 Navigation 6 Opening the tailgate with no-
Manual operation, exterior Neck restraints, front, see touch activation 44
mirrors 61 Head restraints 58 Operating concept, iDrive 18
Manual operation, fuel filler Neck restraints, rear, see Optional equipment, standard
flap 182 Head restraints 59 equipment 7
Manual operation, Park Dis‐ Neutral cleaner, see wheel Outside air, refer to Auto‐
tance Control PDC 136 cleaner 224 matic recirculated-air con‐
Manual operation, rearview New wheels and tires 190 trol 147
camera 138 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ Own Safety 7
Marking, run-flat tires 192 towing 220
Master key, see Remote con‐ P
trol 34 O
Maximum cooling 147 Paint, vehicle 223
Maximum speed, display 88 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 205 Panoramic glass sunroof 49
Maximum speed, winter OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ Parallel parking assistant 140
tires 191 agnosis 205 Park Distance Control
Measurement, units of 94 Obstacle marking, rearview PDC 135
Medical kit 218 camera 139 Parked-car ventilation 149
Memory, seat, mirror 59 Octane rating, see Recom‐ Parked vehicle, condensa‐
Menu in instrument clus‐ mended fuel grade 184 tion 171
ter 90 Odometer 86 Parking aid, see PDC 135
Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Office 6 Parking assistant 140
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ Offroad trips 168 Parking brake 72
ing concept 20 Oil 199 Parking lights 97
Messages, see Check Con‐ Oil, adding 200 Parts and accessories 7
trol 82 Oil additives 201 Passenger side mirror, tilting
Microfilter 146, 148 Oil change 201 downward 61
Minimum tread, tires 190 Oil change interval, service Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
Mirror 60 requirements 87 era 139
Mirror memory 59 Oil filler neck 200 PDC Park Distance Con‐
Mobile communication devi‐ Oil types, alternative 201 trol 135
ces in the vehicle 169 Oil types, suitable 201 Pedestrian warning with city
Mobility System 192 Old batteries, disposal 216 braking function 114
Modifications, technical, see On-board computer 90 Performance Control 122
Own Safety 7 On-board computer, refer to Personal Profile 35
Moisture in headlight 207 On-board computer 90 Personal Profile, exporting
Monitor, see Control Dis‐ Onboard monitor, see Control profiles 36
play 18 Display 18
237
Pinch protection system, Refueling 182 Safety belts 56

glass sunroof 51 Remaining range 86 Safety belts, care 224
Pinch protection system, win‐ Remote control/key 34 Safety switch, windows 49
dows 49 Remote control, malfunc‐ Safety systems, airbags 102
Plastic, care 224 tion 38 Saving fuel 175
Power failure 215 Remote control, univer‐ Screen, see Control Dis‐
Power windows 48 sal 151 play 18
Prescribed engine oil Replacement fuse 216 Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
types 201 Replacing parts 206 hicle tool kit 206
Pressure, tire air pres‐ Replacing wheels/tires 190 Screw thread, refer to Screw
sure 186 Reporting safety malfunc‐ thread for tow fitting, screw
Pressure warning, tires 109 tions 10 thread for tow fitting 221
Profile, see Personal Pro‐ RES button, see Camera- Sealant 192
file 35 based cruise control, Seat and mirror memory 59
Programmable memory but‐ ACC 126 Seat belts, see Safety
tons, iDrive 24 RES button, see Cruise con‐ belts 56
Protective function, glass trol 132 Seat heating, front 55
sunroof 51 Reserve warning, see Seating position for chil‐
Protective function, win‐ Range 86 dren 64
dows 49 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Seats 52
Push-and-turn switch, see TPM 106 Seats, front 52
Controller 19 Retaining straps, securing Seats, rear 55
cargo 173 Selection list in instrument
R Retreaded tires 191 cluster 90
Roadside parking lights 98 Selector lever, Steptronic
Radiator fluid 202 RON recommended fuel transmission 77
Radio 6 grade 184 Sensors, care 225
Radio-operated key, see Re‐ Roofliner 17 Service and warranty 8
mote control 34 Roof load capacity 229 Service requirements, Condi‐
Radio ready state 68 Roof-mounted luggage tion Based Service
Rain sensor 75 rack 173 CBS 204
Rear lights 211 Rope for tow-starting/ Service requirements, dis‐
Rear seat backrest tilt 55 towing 220 play 87
Rear seats 55 RSC Run Flat System Com‐ Services, ConnectedDrive 6
Rear socket 156 ponent, see Run-flat Servotronic 123
Rearview camera 137 tires 192 SET button, see Camera-
Rearview mirror 60 Rubber components, based cruise control,
Rear window de‐ care 224 ACC 126
froster 145, 148 Run-flat tires 192 SET button, see Cruise con‐
Recirculated-air filter 148 trol 132
Recirculated-air S Settings, locking/unlock‐
mode 145, 147 ing 45
Recommended fuel Safe braking 170 Settings on Control Dis‐
grade 184 Safety belt reminder for driv‐ play 93
Recommended tire er's seat and front passen‐ Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
brands 191 ger seat 57 ror 59
238
Shift paddles on the steering Steptronic Sport transmis‐ Temperature, automatic cli‐
wheel 79 sion, refer to Steptronic mate control 147
Side airbags 102 transmission 77 Temperature display for ex‐
Signaling, horn 14 Steptronic transmission 77 ternal temperature 86
Signals when unlocking 46 Stopping the engine 69 Temperature, engine 91
Sitting safely 52 Storage compartment in the Terminal, starting aid 219
Size 228 rear 162 Text messages, supplemen‐
Ski and snowboard bag 159 Storage compartments 160 tary 85
Slide/tilt glass roof 49 Storage compartments, loca‐ Theft alarm system, see
Snow chains 195 tions 160 Alarm system 46
Socket 155 Storage, tires 192 Thigh support 54
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Storing the vehicle 225 Tilt alarm sensor 47
nostics 205 Suitable engine oil types 201 Time of arrival 91
SOS button 217 Summer tires, tread 190 Tire damage 190
Spare fuse 216 Sun visor 155 Tire identification marks 188
Spare tire, see Emergency Supplementary text mes‐ Tire inflation pressure 186
wheel 213 sages 85 Tire inflation pressure moni‐
Speed, average 91 Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ tor, refer to FTM 109
Speed limit detection, on- ing 124 Tire Pressure Monitor
board computer 92 Switch-on times, parked-car TPM 105
Speed limiter, display 88 ventilation 149 Tires, changing 190
Speed Limit Information 88 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Tire sealant 192
Speed warning 93 Symbols 6 Tires, everything on wheels
Split screen 23 Symbols in the status field 23 and tires 186
Sport displays 92 SYNC program, automatic cli‐ Tires, run-flat tires 192
SPORT program, Dynamic mate control 148 Tire tread 190
Driving Control 124 Tone 6
Sport program, transmis‐ T Tool 206
sion 78 Total vehicle weight 229
Sport steering, variable 123 Tachometer 86 Touchpad 21
Stability control systems 120 Tailgate, automatic 41 Tow fitting 221
Start/stop, automatic func‐ Tailgate closing 41 Towing 219
tion 70 Tailgate, closing with no- Tow lug, see Tow fitting 221
Start/Stop button 68 touch activation 44 Tow-starting 219
Start function during malfunc‐ Tailgate opening 40 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tion 35 Tailgate, opening with no- tor 105
Starting the engine 69 touch activation 44 Traction control 121
Status control display, Tailgate via remote con‐ TRACTION, driving dynam‐
tires 106 trol 38 ics 121
Status information, iDrive 23 Tail lights 211 Transmission lock, releasing
Status of Owner's Manual 7 Technical changes, see Own manually 79
Steering assistance 123 Safety 7 Transmission, Steptronic
Steering wheel, adjusting 62 Technical data 228 transmission 77
Steering wheel heating 62 Telephone 6 Transporting children
Temperature, air condi‐ safely 64
tioner 145 Tread, tires 190
239
Triple turn signal activa‐ Vehicle jack 213 Windshield washer sys‐
tion 73 Vehicle paint 223 tem 74
Trip odometer 86 Vehicle storage 225 Windshield wiper, see wiper
Trip on-board computer 92 Vehicle wash 222 system 74
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐ Ventilation 149 Winter storage, care 225
eter 86 Ventilation, refer to Parked- Winter tires, suitable
Turning circle lines, rearview car ventilation 149 tires 191
camera 139 VIN, see vehicle identification Winter tires, tread 190
Turn signal, bulb replace‐ number 10 Wiper 74
ment 208, 209 Voice activation system 26 Wiper blades, replacing 206
Turn signals, operation 73 Wiper fluid 76
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ W Wiper, fold-out position 76
placement 211 Wiper system 74
Warning and indicator lamps, Wood, care 224
U see Check Control 82 Word match concept, naviga‐
Warning displays, see Check tion 25
Unintentional alarm 47 Control 82 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
Units of measurement 94 Warning messages, see tool kit 206
Universal remote control 151 Check Control 82
Unlock button, Steptronic Warning triangle 218 X
transmission 78 Warranty 7
Unlocking/locking via door Washer fluid 76 xDrive 122
lock 39 Washer nozzles, wind‐
Unlocking/locking with re‐ shield 76
mote control 37 Washer system 74
Unlocking, settings 45 Washing, vehicle 222
Unpaved roads, cross-coun‐ Water on roads 169
try trips 168 Weights 229
Updates made after the edito‐ Welcome lamps during un‐
rial deadline 7 locking 37
Upholstery care 223 Welcome lights 98
USB interface 156 Wheel cleaner 224
Wheels, changing 190
V Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 186
Vanity mirror 155 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
Variable sport steering 123 FTM 109
Vehicle battery 215 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
Vehicle battery, replac‐ tor TPM 105
ing 215 Window defroster,
Vehicle, break-in 168 rear 145, 148
Vehicle care 223 Windows, powered 48
Vehicle features and op‐ Windshield washer fluid 76
tions 7 Windshield washer noz‐
Vehicle identification num‐ zles 76
ber 10
240
More about BMW
The Ultimate
bmwusa.com Driving Machine®
01 40 2 964 303 ue
*BL2964303001*

t9366 Instructions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

t9366 Instructions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Owner's Manual

A-Z The Ultimate

THE BMW X1.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 303 - VI/15

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 303 - VI/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 303 - VI/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 303 - VI/15

Vehicle features and options Own safety

Event Data Recorder EDR

Vehicle identification formation about motor vehicle safety from

The vehicle identification number can be found

The vehicle identification number can also be

Reporting safety defects

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 303 - VI/15

All around the steering wheel

1 Rear window safety switch 49 Front fog lights 100

Lock 39 Low beams 97

Automatic headlight con‐ 10 Start/stop the engine and switch

High beams, head‐

Roadside parking lights 98

Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

Cruise control rocker switch 132, 126

17 Open the tailgate 40

All around the center console

1 Control Display 18 9 Parking brake 72

Driving Dynamics Control 124

7 Transmission selector lever 77

All around the roofliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lights 100

2 Glass sunroof 49 5 Interior lights 100

3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐

The concept 1 Control Display

2. "Turn off control display" 3. Move in four directions.

Controller with navigation system Buttons on controller

1. Turn. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the phone menu.

BACK Displays the previous display.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

The main menu is displayed.

Selecting menu items

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

Press button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

Audio Open audio menu last listened 2. Press the controller.

Using interactive map and Internet

Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐

Display the menu or open Tap once.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning

SIM card is blocked.

Status field Enter PIN.

Radio symbols Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are turned off.

HD Radio station is being received.

Satellite radio is switched on. Split screen

Selecting the display Running a function

Programmable memory Deleting the button assignments

▷ Travel and on-board comupter information. Symbol Function

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Select additional letters or numbers if

Voice activation system

Executing functions using short Setting the voice dialog